580M / 580 SUPER M / 580 SUPER M+ / 590 SUPER M / 590 SUPER M+

580M
580 SUPER M
580 SUPER M+
590 SUPER M
590 SUPER M+
Series 3
Loader Backhoes

Operator’s Manual

Print No. 84287120

1st edition
©2010 CNH America LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Case is a registered trademark of CNH America LLC. English 01/10
SERIES 3 LOADER/
BACKHOE

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Part Number: 84287120, Issue Date 01-2010

CASE MANUALS
Manuals are available from your Dealer for the operation, service, and repair of your machine. For
prompt convenient service, contact your Dealer for assistance in obtaining the manuals for your
machine.
Your Dealer can expedite your order for Operator’s Manuals, Parts Catalogs, Service Manuals, and
Maintenance records.
Always give the Machine Name, Model, and P.I.N. (Product Identification Number) or S.N. (Serial
Number) of your machine so your Dealer can provide the correct manuals for your machine.

NOTE: Case Construction reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in
specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold.
 THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT SAFETY MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL.
WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL, CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE THAT FOLLOWS AND BE
ALERT TO THE POSSIBILITY OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY

M171D

Safety Decals on this machine use the words Danger, Warning, or Caution, which are defined as follows:
● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. The color associated with Danger is RED.
● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.
● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated with
Caution is YELLOW.
If Safety Decals on this machine are ISO two panel Pictorial, decals are defined as follows:
● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.
● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.
● Background color is YELLOW
● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.

IMPROPER OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE CAN CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. BEFORE
USING THIS MACHINE, MAKE CERTAIN THAT EVERY OPERATOR:
● Is instructed in safe and proper use of the machine.
● Reads and understands the Manual(s) pertaining to the machine.
● Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals on the machine.
● Clears the area of other persons.
● Learns and practices safe use of machine controls in a safe, clear area before operating this
machine on a job site.
It is your responsibility to observe pertinent laws and regulations and follow Case Construction
instructions on machine operation and maintenance.
WARNING_01_NA

CALIFORNIA
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
Battery post, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.

Copyright © 2010 CNH America LLC Rac 84287120NA

All Rights Reserved Issued January, 2010
Case is a registered trademark of CNH America LLC
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
TO THE OWNER
M SERIES 3 LOADER BACKHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
MACHINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

CHAPTER 2
SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

CHAPTER 3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

CHAPTER 4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

CHAPTER 5
LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

CHAPTER 7
ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

CHAPTER 8
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

CHAPTER 9
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

CHAPTER 10
AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - DEALER COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - OWNERS COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac I

II Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA
 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Chapter 1
TO THE OWNER
M SERIES 3 LOADER BACKHOES

BD07J079 Figure 1
This manual contains important information about the safe operation, adjustment and maintenance of your Case
Loader Backhoe. Refer to the Detail Index at the end of this manual for locating specific items about your machine.
The Loader Backhoe conforms to current safety regulations.
Use this manual as a guide. Your Loader Backhoe will remain a reliable working tool as long as it is kept in working
condition and serviced properly.
DO NOT operate or permit anyone to operate or service this machine until you or the other persons have read and
understand the safety, operation and maintenance instructions in this manual. Use only trained operators who have
demonstrated the ability to operate and service this machine correctly and safely.
The authorized attachments and equipment available for use with this machine are intended for general earth
moving purposes, handling, ditch digging, etc. This Operators Manual does not include instructions for
attachments. Read the manual(s) provided with the authorized attachment to learn safe maintenance and
operation of the machine. Make sure the machine is suitably equipped for the type of work to be performed.
Contact your Dealer if you have any questions concerning the use of attachments for these machines.
DO NOT use this machine for any application or purpose other than those described in this manual. If the
machine is to be used in an application that involves special attachments or equipment, such as forestry, etc.,
consult an authorized dealer. Consult an authorized dealer on changes, additions or modifications that can be
required for this machine to comply with various country regulations and safety requirements. Unauthorized
modifications will cause serious injury or death. Anyone making such unauthorized modifications is responsible for
the consequences.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 1-1

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

BD07J080 Figure 2
This Operators Manual is to be stored in the manual compartment equipped on this machine. Make sure this
manual is complete and in good condition. Consult your Dealer to obtain additional manuals or manuals in other
languages. A SAFETY VIDEO is included with each machine. Take the time to watch this safety video and
understand its content.
Consult your Dealer for any further information or assistance about your machine. Your dealer has approved
service parts.
OPERATOR MANUAL STORAGE COMPARTMENT DO NOT remove this manual or the safety manual
from the machine. See your dealer for additional
manuals.

BD07J081 Figure 3
READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make
BD03H042
sure you understand the controls. All equipment has Always face the machine and use the hand rails and
a limit. Make sure you understand the speed, brakes, steps when getting on or getting off. Do not rush.
steering, stability and load characteristics of this
machine before you start to operate.

1-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

RIGHT, LEFT, FRONT AND REAR OF MACHINE

2 2

1 3 1 3

Basic Machine Backhoe

and Loader

B890918J / B890917J Figure 4

1. LEFT 2. FRONT 3. RIGHT 4. REAR

The terms Right-hand, Left-hand, Front, and Rear, when used in this manual, indicate the right and left sides of the
machine as seen from the operators seat.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 1-3

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

Write the Product Identification Number (P.I.N.) and the engine serial number on the lines provided below. If
needed, give these numbers to your Dealer when you need parts or information for your machine. Keep a record of
these numbers and your Manufacturers Statement of Origin in a safe place. If the machine is stolen, report the
numbers to your local law enforcement agency.
Always give these numbers and component plate numbers to your Dealer when you need parts or information for
your machine.
MACHINE MODEL NUMBER......................................................................................................................................
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ....................................................................................................................
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER .......................................................................................................................................
ROPS CAB OR CANOPY ...........................................................................................................................................
TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................................................................
REAR AXLE ................................................................................................................................................................
FRONT DRIVE AXLE (4WD).......................................................................................................................................
4-IN-1 LOADER BUCKET (Part Number) ..................................................................................................................
STANDARD LOADER BUCKET (Part Number) .........................................................................................................
BACKHOE BUCKET (Part Number) ...........................................................................................................................

RCPH09TLB007AAF Figure 5 RCPH09TLB003AAF Figure 7

PRODUCT INFORMATION NUMBER (PIN) LOCATED ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LOCATED ON THE LEFT REAR OF
BENEATH THE PIVOT FOR THE LOADER LIFT CYLINDER ENGINE
NOTE: Hoses removed for illustration clarity.

RCPH09TLB010AAF Figure 6
RCPH09TLB002AAF Figure 8

PRODUCT INFORMATION NUMBER (PIN) LOCATED ON ROPS CAB PLATE

CHASSIS

1-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

RCPH09TBL005AAF Figure 9
FRONT AXLE PLATE

RCPH09TLB006AAF Figure 10
REAR AXLE

RCPH09TLB004AAF Figure 11
TRANSMISSION PLATE
OTHER COMPONENTS THAT HAVE PLATES, NOT SHOWN.
Hydraulic Pump
Control Valves
Buckets

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 1-5

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE COMPONENTS

5
3
4

10 7 6
9 8

BD07J080 Figure 12

1. 4 IN 1 LOADER BUCKET 2. BUCKET CYLINDERS

3. CAB 4. BOOM
5. DIPPER (EXTENDABLE) 6. BACKHOE BUCKET
7. LEFT STABILIZER (TRANSPORT POSITION) 8. FUEL TANK AND STEP
9. LEFT LOADER LIFT CYLINDER 10. LIFT ARM SUPPORT STRUT

Figure 13

1-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

3
2 5

4
6

BD07J084 Figure 14
SERIES 3 INTERIOR WITH POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION AND 4 IN 1 LOADER

1. DIRECTION AND POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION 2. LEFT FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL

CONTROL
3. RIGHT FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL 4. ELECTRONIC FOOT THROTTLE
5. ELECTR-HYDRAULIC LOADER CONTROL LEVER 6. RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE PANEL
7. LED DISPLAY SCREEN 8. ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE

Figure 15

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 1-7

 CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

NOTES

1-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Chapter 2
SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

UTILITY SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
OPERATOR PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Mounting And Dismounting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starting And Stopping Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Maintenance Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fuel Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Burn Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Hazardous Chemical Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Wheel And Tire Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Roll-Over Protective Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Seat Belt Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Specific Precautions To This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Cast Ductile Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
HAND SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 2-1

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

2-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

SAFETY RULES

WARNING: This safety alert symbol indicates important safety messages in this manual. When you see
this symbol, carefully read the message that follows and be alert to the possibility of death or serious injury.
Figure 1
Most accidents involving machine operation and maintenance can be avoided by following basic rules and
precautions. Read and understand all the safety messages in this manual, the AEM (Association of Equipment
Manufacturers) Safety Manual, the safety decals on the machine and the Safety Video, before you operate or
service the machine. See your Dealer if you have any questions.
Safety Decals on these machines use the words,
Danger, Warning or Caution, which are defined as
follows:
1 • Danger: Indicates an immediate hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury. The color associated
with Danger is RED.
• WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation that, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury. The color associated
with Warning is ORANGE.
• CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to
alert against unsafe practices. The color
BD00F137 Figure 2 associated with Caution is YELLOW.
1. OPERATOR’S MANUAL STORAGE LOCATED IN THE
RIGHT CONSOLE STORAGE COMPARTMENT
ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as
follows:
Safety messages in this section point out situations
which can be encountered dur ing the nor mal • The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.
operation and maintenance of your machine. These • The second panel indicates the appropriate
safety messages also give possible ways of dealing avoidance of the hazard.
with these conditions. • The background color is YELLOW.
Additional safety messages appear in the manual to Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if
indicate specific safety hazards. used, are RED.
READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make
sure you understand the characteristics of speed,
stability, steering, and operation of this machine.
Do not remove this manual or the safety manual from
this machine. See your Case dealer for additional
manuals. Also see the inside of the rear cover of this
manual for detailed information for ordering manuals.
The safety information given in this manual does not
replace safety codes, insurance regulations, or
federal, state/provincial, or local laws. Make sure
your machine has the correct equipment according to
these rules or laws.
IMPORTANT: The safety messages in this section
point out situations which can happen during the
normal operation and maintenance of your machine.
These safety messages also give possible ways of
dealing with these conditions.
Additional safety messages are used in the text of
the manual to show specific safety hazards.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-3

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

UTILITY SAFETY
Safety precaution MUST be followed when working
near buried Utility Lines.
During operation it is likely that you will be working
around or near buried utility lines which may include,
but are not limited to:
• Electrical Power Line
• Gas Line
• Water Line
• Communication Line - Telephone or Cable
Television
Before beginning any trenching, drilling or other
construction work it is your responsibility to be aware
of all such utility lines buried in the area of your
project and to avoid them.
ALWAYS have all local utility companies mark the
location of their lines. RH99G001 Figure 3
CALL ALL LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES BEFORE YOU
In U.S.A. and Canada call one of many “One Call TRENCH , DRILL OR DIG UNDERGROUND
System Director” services. If you do not know the
Know the utility color code (U.S.A. and Canada):
local number, call the national number (U.S.A. and
Canada only): 1-888-258-0808. Electric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Gas, Oil, or Petroleum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yellow
Check with local authorities for laws, regulations
Communication, Telephone,
and/or strict penalties requiring you to locate and
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
avoid existing utilities.
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
Sewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Green/Brown
Proposed Excavation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
Surveying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pink
Reclaimed Water and Slurry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purple
After locating the utility lines, carefully dig a hole by
hand and/or automatic vacuum equipment to the
utility line to verify the location and depth of the line.

2-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

OPERATOR PRECAUTIONS
PERSONNEL MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING PRECAUTIONS
• If your machine is equipped with pilot controls you • Use the recommended hand holds and steps with
must always know which contol pattern is engaged at least three points of support when getting on
before actuating the hydraulics. and off the machine. Keep steps and platform
• Be prepared for emergencies. Always have a first clean. Face the access system when climbing up
aid kit and a working fire extinguisher with you and and down.
know how to use each. • Do not jump off the machine.
• Avoid loose fitting clothing, loose or uncovered • Do not dismount while the machine is in motion.
long hair, jewelry and loose personal articles. • Foreign material or grease on the steps and hand
• Know and use the protective equipment that is to rails can cause an accident. Keep the steps and
be worn when operating this machine. Hard hats, hand rails clean.
protective glasses, protective shoes, gloves,
reflector type vests, respirators and ear protection
are examples of typed of equipment that may be
required.
• Certain protective equipment should be replaced
and renewed upon age and wear. Old hard hats
may not afford the original users intention. Faded
and soiled vest are no longer as highly visible as
original intent. See the manufacture’s
recommendation.
• Do not rush. Walk, do not run.
• Know and use the hand signals required for BD03H042 Figure 4
particular jobs and know who has the
responsibility for signaling. STARTING AND STOPPING PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL • Walk around the machine and warn all personnel
who may be servicing the machine or are in the
• It is the responsibility of the operator to read and machine path prior to starting. Do not start until all
understand the Operator’s Manual and other personnel are clearly away from the machine.
information provided and use the correct operating Sound the horn, if equipped, before starting.
procedure. Machines should be operated only by
qualified operators. • Walk around the machines tool, attachment, or
furthermost contact point to view operation danger
• Do not operate this machine or perform area from the worksite personnel view and angle.
maintenance work if you have not had appropriate
training and read and fully understand the • Check that the parking device is applied, place the
instructions and warnings in this manual. transmission in neutral or park as specified by the
manufacturer, and disengage the PTO, if so
• Wear the seat belt to maximize the protection equipped, before starting the machine.
capability of a ROPS (Roll Over Protective
Structure) when the machine is so equipped. • Adjust, secure and latch the seat and fasten the
seat belt before starting the machine. Make sure
• Inspect the ROPS and seat belt mounting bolts on that, when sitting firmly against the back of the
a daily basis to ensure their integrity. seat, you can operate all control, brakes and
• Do not permit riders on the machine. necessary functions, through there entire range of
• Make sure that all protective guards, canopies, motion.
doors, etc. are in place and secure. • Start and operate the machine only from the
• Remove all loose object stored in the machine. operator’s station.
Remove all objects which do not belong in or on • Do not bypass the machine’s neutral-start system.
the machine and its equipment. The neutral-start system must be repaired if it
malfunctions.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-5

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Use jumper cables only in the recommended • Carry loads in recommended positions for
manner. Improper use can result in battery maximum stability.
explosion or unexpected machine motion. • Never lift loads in excess of capacity.
Ventilate the battery area before using jumper
cables. Make sure that using jumper cables will not • Use the recommended machine ballast and
interfere or harm electronic processing or counterweighting.
computer devices. • Know and understand the job site traffic flow
• Do not operate the engine in an enclosed area patterns and obey signalmen, road signs and
without adequate ventilation. flagmen.

• Park the machine on level ground whenever • Know and understand that job site conditions may
possible and apply the parking brake. On grades, change on an hourly basis. Hills of dirt, debris or
park the machine with the wheels or track securely obstructions may grow and change from the time
blocked. you began the day. It is your responsibility to
monitor the changes and keep the machine, tools
• Before leaving the operator’s station, place the and attachments, etc. a safe distance.
transmission in the park position, lower the
equipment to the ground or put in the locked • Watch for bystanders and never allow anyone to
position, disengage the PTO, if so equipped, set be under or to reach through the machine and its
the parking device and shut off the engine. equipment while operating.

• Remove the starter key or master electrical • Select a gear that will prevent excessive speed
disconnect switch, (if equipped), when leaving the when going downhill. Do not coast downhill.
machine parked or unattended. • When roading a machine, know and use the
signaling devices required on the machine.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Provide and escort for roading where required.
• OSHA requirements make it the employer’s
responsibility to fully instruct each operator in the
• On machines with independently operated wheel
brakes, lock the brake pedals together when
proper and safe operation of all operative
roading to provide equalized brake application.
equipment. Both employer and employee should
thoroughly familiarize themselves with this manual. • Use the recommended transport devices when
roading the machine.
• Check brakes, steering and other machine control
devices in accordance with maintenance • Use the approved drawbar and / or attachment
instructions, prior to starting operation. Observe all point, (if equipped), when using the machine for
gauges or warning instruments for proper towing. If a cable or chain is used, keep people
operation. Operate all controls to insure proper away from the tow line.
operation. If any malfunctions are found, remove • Before you operate at night, check that all lamps
the starter key or disconnect switch key. Place a do illuminate.
not operate tag on the machine until the
malfunction is corrected.
• Engine exhaust fumes can cause death. If you
operate this machine in an enclosed area, make
• If a failure that causes loss of control such as sure there is ventilation to replace the exhaust
steering, service brakes or engine occurs, stop the fumes with fresh air.
machine motion as quickly as possible, remove the
starter key or disconnect switch key. Place a do not
• If your machine has a cab make sure that all
windows are clean and that the windshield wipers
operate tag on the machine and keep it securely
work correctly.
parked until the malfunction is corrected or the
machine can be safely towed. • Check all controls in a clear area and make sure
the machine is operating correctly.
• Understand the machine limitations and keep the
machine under control. • Dust, fog, smoke, etc., can decrease your vision
and cause an accident. Stop the machine or
• Operate and drive the machine with care and at decrease the speed until you can see.
speed compatible with conditions. Use extra
caution when operating over rough ground, on • Contact with high voltage power lines,
slopes, and when turning. underground cables, etc., can cause serious injury
or death from electrocution.
• Note and avoid all hazards and obstructions such
as ditches, underground lines, trees, cliffs,
overhead electrical wires or areas where there is
danger of a slide.

2-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Before you drive or operate in an area with high • Do not operate the machine if you do not feel well.
voltage lines, cables, or a power station, tell the This can be dangerous for you and for the people
power or utility company what you are going to do. around you.
You MUST HAVE THE POWER DISCONNECTED OR • You must make a judgment if weather, road, or
KEEP A SAFE WORKING DISTANCE from the lines, earth conditions will permit safe operation on a hill,
cables, or power station. Keep all parts of the ramp, or rough ground.
machine at least 4.6 m (15 feet) away from the
power source. You must also know any federal, • Stay away from hazardous areas such as ditches,
state/provincial, or local safety codes or overhangs, etc. Walk around the work area before
regulations that apply to the job site. you start and look for hazards.

• If a part of the machine touches high voltage • Be alert and always know the location of all
power: workers in your area. Keep all other persons
completely away from your machine. Injury or
1. Warn other workers NOT TO TOUCH THE death can result if you do not follow these
MACHINE and to stay away from the machine. instructions.
2. If you can break contact, reverse the operation
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
that caused contact with the high voltage power,
and move the machine away from the danger • Do not attempt repairs unless trained. Refer to
area. If you cannot break contact stay in the manuals and experienced repair personnel for
machine until the utility company de-energizes help.
the line and tells you that the power is off. • Before you service the machine, put a Do Not
• If you have extreme conditions, such as a fire, etc., Operate tag on the key switch, on the steering
and you are forced to leave the machine, do not wheel or at a location that everyone can clearly
step off the machine. Jump as far from the see. The Do Not Operate tag is included with your
machine as possible with your feet together and do new machine. Addition tags, part number
not touch the ground with your hands. 321-4614 are available from your Case dealer.

BD05C034 / 321-4614 Figure 5

• Wear protective glasses and other required safety • Securely block the machine or any component
equipment when servicing or repairing the that may fall before working on the machine or
machine. component. If possible, use a back up or
• Wear gloves to protect hands when handling secondary blocking device, also.
cable. • To prevent unexpected movement, securely block
• Disconnect the battery before working on the working elements when repairing or changing
electrical system. Know the consequences of working tool parts such as cutting edges.
disconnecting any electronic or computer devices. • Never make repairs on pressurized components,
• Avoid lubrication or mechanical adjustments with fluid, gas or mechanical until the pressure has
the machine in motion or the engine operating. If been relieved according to the manufacturer’s
the engine must be in operation to make certain instructions.
adjustments, place the transmission in neutral, • Use extreme caution when removing radiator
apply the parking device, place the equipment in a caps, drain plugs, grease fittings or pressure taps.
safe position, securely block the wheels and use Park the machine and let it cool down before
extreme caution. opening a pressurized tank.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-7

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Release all pressure before working on systems BURN PREVENTION

which have an accumulator. Use a piece of
cardboard, newspaper, or wood to check for WARNING: BATTERY ACID CAUSES
pressurized leaks to prevent fluid penetrating the SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric
skin. Repressurize accumulators with the proper acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
gas according to manufacturers clothing.
recommendations. Antidote: EXTERNAL - Flush with water.
• When inflating tires, use a self-attaching inflation Antidote: INTERNAL - Drink large quantities
chuck with remote shutoff and stand clear of the of water or milk.
tire. Position yourself beside the tire and not DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical
beside the rim. attention immediately.
• When absolutely necessary to tow the machine, EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and
do not exceed the recommended towing speed. Be seek medical attention immediately.
sure the towing machine has sufficient braking
WARNING: BATTERIES PRODUCE
capacity to stop the towed load. If the towed
EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep sparks, flame,
machine cannot be braked, a towbar must be used
cigars and cigarettes away. Ventilate when
or two towing machines must be used. - one in
charging or using in enclosed area. Always
front pulling and one in the rear to act as a brake.
wear eye protection when working near
Avoid towing over long distances.
batteries. Wash hands after handling. KEEP
• Observe proper maintenance procedures. OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
• Whenever servicing or replacing hardened pins, Figure 6
etc, use a brass drift or other suitable material • When the battery electrolyte is frozen, the battery
between the hammer and pin. can explode if, you try to charge the battery, or you
• Keep the brakes and steering systems in good try to jump start and run the engine. To prevent the
operating condition. battery electrolyte from freezing, try to keep the
battery at full charge. If you do not follow these
• Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety instructions, you or others in the area can be
signs. Keep all safety signs clean.
injured
FUEL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS • Hot coolant can spray out if the radiator cap is
• Do not smoke or permit open flames while fueling removed. To remove the radiator cap, let the
or near fueling operations. cooling system cool, turn to the first notch, wait
• Never remove the fuel cap or refuel gasoline until the pressure is released, then remove the
engine powered machines with the engine running radiator cap.
or hot. Never allow fuel to spill on hot machine HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL PRECAUTIONS
components. Never allow fuel to spill on the
environment.
• If you are exposed to or come in contact with
hazardous chemicals you can be seriously injured.
• To avoid spilling fuel maintain control of the fuel The fluids, lubricants, paints, adhesives, coolants,
filler nozzle when filling the tank. etc., used with your machine can be hazardous.
• Do not fill the fuel tank completely to the top. Allow • Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide
room for expansion. information about the chemical substances within
• Clean up spilled fuel immediately and dispose of a product, safe handling procedures, first aid
contaminated material in an environmentally measures and procedures to be taken when the
correct manner. product is accidentally spilled or released. MSDS
are available from your dealer.
• Tighten the fuel tank cap securely. Should the fuel
cap be lost, replace it only with the original • Before you service your machine, check the
manufacturers approved cap. Use of a MSDS for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in this
non-approved cap without proper venting may machine. This information indicates what the risks
result in pressurization of the tank. are and how to service the machine safely. Follow
this information when servicing the machine.
• Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
• Before you service this machine and before you
• Use the correct fuel grade for the operating dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always
season.
remember the environment. DO NOT put oil or
fluids into the ground or into containers that can
leak.

2-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Check with your local environmental or recycling SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

center or your dealer for correct disposal
information.
2
TRANSPORTING PRECAUTIONS
• Know the rules, laws, and safety equipment
necessary for transporting this machine on a road
or highway.
• Never transport the machine without the transport
pin in position to lock the boom. 1
• If the machine must travel on public roads, all
lights must be in working order and adjusted
correctly. A rotating beacon is recommended.
Figure 8
WHEEL AND TIRE SAFETY
1. RIGHT BELT STRAP METAL END
DO NOT weld to wheel or rim when a tire is 2. LATCH MECHANISM
installed. Welding will cause an explosive air/gas
mixture that will be ignited with high temperatures.
This can happen to tires inflated or deflated.
Removing air or breaking bead is not adequate. The 3
tire MUST be completely removed from the rim prior
to welding.
• Explosive separation of the tire and/or rim parts
can cause injury or death. When tire service is
necessary, have a qualified tire mechanic service
the tire.
ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
• Do NOT modify the ROPS in any manner. Figure 9
Unauthorized modifications such as welding, 3. RELEASE BUTTON
drilling, cutting, or adding attachments can weaken 1. To latch the seat belt, pull the right belt strap from
the structure and reduce your protection. Replace the retractor.
ROPS if it is subjected to roll-over or damage. Do
not attempt to repair. 2. Insert the metal end into the latch mechanism on
the left side of the seat.
WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt. 3. To unlatch the seat belt, press the red button on
Your machine is equipped with a ROPS cab, the left side latch mechanism.
ROPS canopy or ROPS frame for your 4. The seat belt will automatically retract.
protection. The seat belt can help insure your
safety if it is used and maintained. Never WARNING: Before starting the engine
wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the ensure seat belts are securely fastened. The
belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted seat belt can help insure your safety if it is
condition or pinched between the seat used and properly maintained. Never wear a
structural members seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt
Figure 7 system. Never wear the belt in a twisted
condition or pinched between the seat
structural members.
Figure 10

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-9

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Specific Precautions To This Machine

• Keep the load or tool as low as possible while
moving the machine around the jobsite.
• Adjust the rear window before actuating the
backhoe hydraulics. The rear window could come
into contact with the control lever.
• Pilot control machines are equipped with TWO
backhoe control patterns. You must know which
pattern the machine is in, before, actuating the
hydraulics.
• Release all hydraulic pressure before servicing
the machine.
• You must know which circuits have accumulators
and how to release pressure properly.
• Always use the lift arm support strut when
servicing the machine with lift arms up.
• Some Series 3 machines have the capabilty to
choose between two backhoe operating patterns.
You must confirm which pattern the machine is
engaged in before you begin operating the
backhoe.
CAST DUCTILE IRON
• Before you weld, cut, or drill holes on any part of
this machine, make sure the part is not cast
ductile iron. See your Dealer if you do not know if
a part is cast ductile iron. The following are cast
ductile iron parts.
• boom
• 2wd steering link
• dump links
• front axle
• stabilizers
• extendable dipper
• swing tower
• bucket linkage
• Unauthorized modifications to cast ductile iron
parts can cause injury or death. Welding, cutting,
or drilling can cause cast ductile iron to break. Do
not weld, cut, or drill to repair or to attach items to
cast ductile iron parts on this machine.

2-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

SAFETY DECALS
The following safety decals have been placed on your machine in the areas indicated. The following graphics are
for replacement location. Safety decals are intended for the personal safety of you and those working with you.
Please take this manual, walk around your machine and note the content and location of these warning decals.
Review these decals with all machine operators. It is the Owner’s responsibility to keep the decals legible. If they
are not, obtain replacements from your dealer. Part numbers are on the decal. Some decal locations may vary
slightly between various model configurations.
Make sure that you read all the safety decals and all instructional decals. Check these decals every day before you
start. Clean these decals if you cannot read the words.
When you clean the decals, use only a cloth, water, and soap. Do not use solvent, gasoline, etc.
You must replace a decal if the decal is damaged, missing, or cannot be read. If a decal is on a part that is
replaced, make sure the decal is on the new part. Part numbers are on the decal. See your Case dealer for new
decals.

1 2

BS99M128 / BC00G075 Figure 11

1. READ THE APPROPRIATE INFORMATION IN THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL
2. READ THE APPROPRIATE INFORMATION IN THE REPAIR MANUAL
When you see the symbols shown above, refer to the appropriate information in the Operator’s Manual or the
Service Manual.

Figure 12
These symbols may occupy only a small portion of the main decal, as shown below. If you have any questions
regarding operation or service contact your Dealer.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-11

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

1
2

BD07J096 / 392375A1 / 392374A1 Figure 13

1. 392375A1- WARNING: USED ON MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH RIDE CONTROL
2. 392374A1- WARNING: USED ON MACHINES WITHOUT RIDE CONTROL

2-12 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

BD08A454 / 384269A1 / BD00F068 Figure 14

3. 384269A1 - DANGER: EXPLOSION AND RUN OVER HAZARD, ONE EACH SIDE OF THE MACHINE

4
! DANGER

4
Starting in gear can cause
death. Start engine only
from operator seat with
transmission control(s) in
NEUTRAL.

BD00F068 / 321-7040 Figure 15

4. 321-7040 - DANGER: START ONLY FROM OPERATOR SEAT

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-13

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

5
5

BD03H060 / BD04C135 / 384267A1 Figure 16

5. 384267A1 - WARNING: ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD

BD05E127 / 321-6774 Figure 17

6. 321-6774 - WARNING: COMPRESSED SPRING, SEE SERVICE MANUAL

2-14 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

BD03H051 / 384258A1 Figure 18

7. 384258A1 - WARNING: HOT LIQUID UNDER PRESSURE HAZARD

BD00F045 / 321-7030 Figure 19

8. 321-7030 - WARNING: DO NOT JUMP IF MACHINE TIPS, USE SEAT BELT

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-15

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

9
9

BD00G048 / 383972A1 Figure 20

9. 383972A1 - WARNING: DO NOT MODIFY OR REPAIR ROPS

10
10

BD00G061 / 384264A1 Figure 21

10. 384264A1 - WARNING: CRUSH HAZARD

11
11

BD00F072X / 384265A1 Figure 22

11. 384265A1 - WARNING: CRUSH HAZARD

2-16 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

12

12

BD04C137 / 384263A1 Figure 23

12. 384263A1 - WARNING: ROLLOVER, CRUSH HAZARD

13

13

BD03K061 / 313238A1 Figure 24

13. 313238A1 - DANGER: CRUSH HAZARD

14

14

BD04C131 / 38427A1 Figure 25

14. 38427A1 - WARNING: NOT A STEP OR EXIT

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-17

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

16 15 16
15

17

17

BD00H143 / RDL3127 / RDL3125 / RDL3108 Figure 26

4 IN 1 BUCKET WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLER
15. RDL3125 - WARNING: CRUSH HAZARD
16. RDL3108 - WARNING: KEEP OUT FROM UNDER LOADER AND ATTACHMENTS
17. RDL3127 - WARNING: PINCH POINT

18

19

19
18

BD00H145 / RDL3129 / RDL3141 Figure 27

4 IN 1 BUCKET WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLER (IF EQUIPPED)
18. RDL3129 - WARNING: READ AND UNDERSTAND ATTACHMENT MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING.
19. RDL3141 - WARNING: DO NOT USE HANDS TO FIND HYDRAULIC LEAKS. RELIEVE PRESSURE BEFORE DISCONNECTING LINES.

2-18 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

20

20

BD00H045 / RDL3139
4 IN 1 BUCKET WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLER (IF EQUIPPED)

20. RDL3139 - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS:

21

21

BD00F133 / 384260A1 Figure 28

RIDE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
21. 384260A1 - WARNING: PRESSURIZED SYSTEM HAZARD

23

23 24 24

BD03H058 / RDL3107 / RDL3141 LOADER HYDRAULIC COUPLER (IF EQUIPPED)

22. RDL3107 - WARNING: READ ATTACHMENT OPERATORS MANUAL
23. RDL3141 - WARNING: FULLY ENGAGE LATCH PINS BEFORE OPERATING

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-19

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

LOCATION A

24

25

LOCATION B

BD00F037 / D149826 / D149827 Figure 29

24. D149826 - CAUTION: OPERATE BACKHOE FROM OPERATOR SEAT ONLY
25. D149827 - CAUTION: OPERATE BACKHOE FROM OPERATOR SEAT ONLY
Location A
(D149826 Decal) - Machines with Mechanical Control Backhoe with Standard Dipper.
(D149827 Decal) - Machines with Mechanical Control Backhoe with Extendahoe
Location B
(D149826 Decal) - Machines with Pilot Control Backhoe

2-20 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

26

26
27

BD08B481 / 144193A2 Figure 30

26. 144193A2 - IMPORTANT: READ OPERATORS MANUAL AND ALL SAFETY AND INSTRUCTIONAL DECALS
27. - PARKING BRAKE INSTRUCTIONS

28

28

BD03H024 / 87305413 Figure 31

28. 87414205 - WARNING: MACHINE IS EQUIPPED WITH TWO BACKHOE PATTERNS, VERIFY PATTERN BEFORE OPERATING

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-21

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

29
29

29

BD03H023 / BD03H024 / 87423813 Figure 32

29. 87423813 - WARNING: TURN OFF BACKHOE CONTROL SYSTEM BEFORE ADJUSTING WINDOWS (ONE EACH SIDE)

2-22 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

30

30

BD03H064 / 87433209 Figure 33

30. 87433209 - WARNING: ROLLOVER CRUSH HAZARD

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-23

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

HAND SIGNALS
It is recommended that you and the flagman on the job use hand signals for communications. Before you start,
make sure that you both understand the signals that will be used.

BD08B638 Figure 34 BD08B641 Figure 36

START ENGINE STOP ENGINE

BD08B634 Figure 35 BD08B635 Figure 37

COME TO ME ALL STOP AND HOLD
Move hands forward and rearward (palms in) Move hands forward and rearward (palms out).

2-24 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Hand Signals Continued -

BD08B642 Figure 40
BD08B639 Figure 38 RAISE LOAD OR BUCKET
GO THIS FAR Turn finger and hand in counterclockwise move

BD08B644 Figure 41
ALL STOP AND HOLD
BD08B640 Figure 39
STOP
Move one hand back and forth.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-25

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Hand Signals Continued -

BD08B636 Figure 42 BD08B637 Figure 44

EMERGENCY STOP
RAISE LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY
Move both hands up and down.

BD08B643 Figure 43 BD08B645 Figure 45

LOWER LOAD OR BUCKET TURN MACHINE LEFT

SWING LOAD LEFT
Move finger and hand in counterclockwise motion.
To stop movement, stop moving hand and make
a fist.

2-26 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Hand Signals Continued -

BD08B647 Figure 46 BD08B646 Figure 48

ROLL BACK LOADER BUCKET
TURN MACHINE RIGHT
SWING LOAD RIGHT
To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a
fist.

BD08B663 Figure 47
LOWER LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY

BD08B648 Figure 49
DUMP LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-27

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Hand Signals Continued -

BD08B662 Figure 52
BD08B645 Figure 50
BACKHOE BUCKET DIG
TURN MACHINE LEFT
SWING LOAD LEFT
To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a fist

BD08B646 Figure 53

BD08B664 Figure 51 TURN MACHINE RIGHT

SWING LOAD RIGHT
MOVE BACKHOE DIPPER IN
To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a
fist.

2-28 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Hand Signals Continued -

BD08B650 Figure 54
MOVE BACKHOE DIPPER OUT BD08B660 Figure 56
EXTENDAHOE DIPPER RETRACT

BD08B649 Figure 55
BACKHOE DIPPER DUMP

BD08B661 Figure 57
EXTENDAHOE DIPPER EXTEND

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 2-29

 CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

NOTES

2-30 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Chapter 3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT CONSOLE AND STEERING COLUMN MOUNTED CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

STANDARD TRANSMISSION CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
FOOT PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
LOADER CONTROL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
LEFT REAR CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
BACKHOE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
EXTENDAHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING AND EXTENDABLE DIPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
BACKHOE WITH PILOT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
LEFT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
RIGHT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC ATTACHMENT CONTROL FOR BACKHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
CAB CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 3-1

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

3-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

This Chapter identifies the location and gives an explanation of controls and functions found on this family of
machines. Use this Chapter to familiarize yourself with these locations and functions before operating the machine.
See the Operating Instructions in the next Chapter for more detailed instruction on the interaction of the
Instruments, Controls and the Operation of the machine.

FRONT CONSOLE AND STEERING COLUMN MOUNTED CONTROLS

LEFT SIDE FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL Comfort Steer activation is based on the selected
gear as shown on the gear selection lever, NOT the
engaged gear. Use the Comfort Steer option in cyclic
loader work where operator fatigue may be reduced.
NOTE: The machine must be running to engage
Comfort Steer.
When any one of the following requirements are met
the Comfort Steer option will disengage.
1
• Comfort Steer will disengage and return to normal
2 steer if the operator pushes the left portion of the
switch.
3
• Comfort Steer will disengage and default to
normal steer when the key switch is turned to OFF,
or the machine loses electrical power.
• Comfort Steer will disengage when the operator
selects 3rd or 4th gear on the transmission. If the
system is disengaged this way, the operator must
select a lower gear and press the switch to
BD07J085 Figure 1 re-activate.
1. COMFORT STEER SWITCH: See page 4-14 in the Operation Chapter of this
manual for additional information.
If equipped, push the right side of this
switch to activate the comfort steer
option. The right side of this switch is 2. FRONT WIPER SWITCH:
momentary and it will spring back to The front wiper switch is a three position
center when released. The yellow switch. Push the rocker switch emblem
comfort steer symbol will illuminate when to the first position to turn the front wiper
the system is active. to LOW. Push the rocker switch emblem
BS06K135 Figure 2 to the second position to turn the front
With normal steering the operator must turn the wiper to HIGH. Push the opposite end of
steering wheel three full turns to move the wheels, the rocker switch to turn the front wiper
full left to right or right to left, lock to lock. Comfort OFF.
Steer requires slightly less than one and a half turns BC00G012 Figure 4
of the steering wheel for the same lock to lock
movement. 3. FRONT WINDSHIELD WASHER
SWITCH:
WARNING: Quick response steering may Push the rocker switch emblem to
adversely affect machine stability under activate the front windshield washer.
some operating condition. DO NOT use this Release the rocker switch to stop the
feature until you are completely accustomed front windshield washer.
to faster steering response. BS98M034 Figure 5
Figure 3
Activate Comfort Steer on level ground in 1st gear
and operate the machine in a safe, open area until
comfortable with the faster steering.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-3

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LEFT SIDE FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL RIGHT SIDE FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL

6
7
8
9
10
4
5

BD07J086 Figure 9

BD07J085 Figure 6
6. FRONT WORK LAMP SWITCH:
Push the right side of this rocker switch
4. LOADER QUICK to activate the work lamps. Push the left
COUPLER SWITCH: side of the switch to turn the lights off.
If equipped, push the left side BS96H045 Figure 10
of this switch to disconnect
7. HAZARD FLASHER LAMP
the coupler. Push the right
SWITCH:
side of the switch to connect
or couple to the attachment. Push the right side of this rocker switch
to activate the flashers. Push the left side
BC00G013 Figure 7
of the switch to turn the flashers off.
5. AUTO - MANUAL SHIFT SWITCH: BS98M063 Figure 11
If equipped, on Powershift 8. ROTATING BEACON SWITCH:
transmissions, use this switch to select If equipped, this switch activates the
from AUTO shift to MANUAL shift. rotating beacon. Push the right side of
this switch to activate the beacon. Push
GRAPHIC_ID Figure 8 the left side of the switch to turn the
beacon off.
BC00B082 Figure 12
9. BLANK SWITCH:
10. BLANK SWITCH

3-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

STEERING COLUMN MOUNTED CONTROLS

A B

1
2
3
BD08A299
Figure 17
When turn signals are activated the appropriate
green lamp will illuminate off and on.
A = left turn signal is activated
BD00F014 Figure 13
This control lever activates three functions. Horn, B = right turn signal is activated
Driving lamps and Turn signals. Be alert to cancel the
turn signal function when complete. The Turn Signal
control does not cancel itself after tur ning is
complete.

1. HORN:
Push in on this lever to activate the horn.
4
BS98M064 Figure 14

2. DRIVING LAMP SWITCH:

Pull the control lever toward you for ON
and push the control lever away from you
for OFF.
BS98M062 Figure 15

3. TURN SIGNAL LEVER:

Push the control lever up to signal a left BD03H036 Figure 18
turn. Pull the control lever down to signal 4. STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER:
a right turn. You must move the control If equipped, pull the lever up toward the operator
lever to the center position to stop the to adjust the steering wheel. Release the lever
signal. when the desired position is reached and confirm
BS96H047 Figure 16 that the steering wheel is locked into position by
pulling and pushing gently.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-5

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

STANDARD TRANSMISSION CONTROLS

3. CLUTCH CUTOUT BUTTON:

Push this button before you shift the
1 transmission gears. The FNR Shuttle is
in NEUTRAL when this button is pushed.
BC00B098 Figure 22
IMPORTANT: This procedure is to be used only in
the event of an emergency when the unit must be
moved to a safe location. Have the machine repaired
immediately.
Transmission limp mode: If the direction control lever
fails to engage Forward or Reverse, the operator may
move the machine a short distance, for safer service.
WARNING: Warning: This procedure is only to be
used to move the machine a very short distance, or
BD00F143 Figure 19 safer location.
To go forward: Pull the Direction Control Lever BACK
1. DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER:
to Reverse and then push it up to Forward.
This lever, located on the left side of the
To go rearward: Confirm that the area behind the
steering column, controls the travel
machine is clear. Push the Direction Control Lever
direction of the machine. The center
FORWARD and then BACK to reverse.
position N is NEUTRAL. The top position
F is FORWARD. To travel forward, lift the Leave the Direction Control Lever in the direction
F lever and push completely forward desired until the machine is stopped.
N toward the F position. The bottom
R position R is REVERSE. To travel in
reverse, lift the lever and pull completely
rearward. Make sure the direction control
lever is in N or NEUTRAL before you
start the engine or before you operate
the backhoe.
Figure 20

BD00F141 Figure 21
2. TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER:
The transmission has synchromesh in all four
gears. The operator may shift to any gear without
stopping the machine. Push the clutch cutout
button (3) on the transmission shift lever before
you shift. Release the button to engage the
clutch after the shift.

3-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLS

In manual transmission mode the machine will stay in
the gear selected until the operator changes the
selection. The operator may select gears without
1 stopping the machine.
• Position 1 - 1st gear, forward or reverse
• Position 2 - 2nd gear, forward or reverse
• Position 3 - 3rd gear, forward or reverse
• Position 4 - 4th gear, forward
In automatic transmission mode the machine will
2 reach the maximum gear selected by the Gear
Selection Lever.
• Position 1 - no automatic shifting, transmission will
remain in 1st gear
• Position 2 - no automatic shifting, transmission will
BD07J099 Figure 23 remain in 2nd gear
1. DIRECTION AND GEAR SELECTION CONTROL LEVER
2. TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN BUTTON
• Position 3 - automatic shifting between 2nd and
3rd gear
1. DIRECTION AND GEAR SELECTION • Position 4 - automatic shifting between 2nd, 3rd
CONTROL LEVER: and 4th gear
This lever controls the travel direction of the machine When operating in automatic mode, some incline and
and the gear selection. load conditions may cause the transmission to shift
To select machine direction: from 4th to 3rd and back to 4th, or from 3rd to 2nd
The center position N is NEUTRAL. The top position and back to 3rd. If this happens select a lower gear.
F is FORWARD. The bottom position R is REVERSE. D ow n s h i f t a s n e e d e d u n t i l t h e t ra n s m i s s i o n
discontinues shifting between gears.
To travel forward in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear, pull the
lever up, toward the operator, and push it all the way
forward toward the F position.
The bottom position R is REVERSE. To travel in reverse
in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear, pull the lever up, toward the
operator and pull completely rearward.
Make sure the direction control lever is in N or
NEUTRAL before you start the engine or before you
operate the backhoe. 3

BD08A482 Figure 25
3. AUTO - MANUAL SWITCH LOCATED ON THE LET SIDE
FRONT CONSOLE, IF EQUIPPED
The Powershift Transmission allows the operator to
select automatic or manual mode by engaging the
AUTO - MANUAL switch, regardless of speed.
IMPORTANT: On start up the transmission mode will
BD07J100 Figure 24 be the position the AUTO - MANUAL switch was in,
To select gear: when the engine was stopped.
Rotate the lever hand grip to align the number, which
corresponds to each gear, with the indicator mark on
the lever.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-7

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN CONTROLS

The transmission kickdown controls are used to change automatically from 2nd gear to 1st gear, when in manual
mode, to increase digging force. There are two kickdown controls. One is a push button located at the end of the
directional control / gear selection lever. The other is a momentary button switch located in the handle of the loader
control lever. Press the button once to downshift from 2nd gear to 1st gear. Press the button again to shift back to
2nd gear. If the button has been pressed to downshift to 1st gear, changing directions from forward to reverse will
shift the transmission into 2nd gear reverse. Changing directions back to forward will shift the transmission into 2nd
gear forward.

2
1

BD07J087 Figure 26 BD07J099 Figure 27

1. LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED TRANSMISSION 2. DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED TRANSMISSION
KICKDOWN BUTTON KICKDOWN BUTTON

3-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

FOOT PEDALS

3
2
1

BD08A483 Figure 28
1. LEFT SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL:
Push this pedal to help turn the machine to the
left, when in the configuration, shown above, with
the pedals unlocked.
2. RIGHT SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL: 4
Push this pedal to help turn the machine to the
right, when in the configuration, shown above,
with the pedals unlocked.
3. ELECTRONIC FOOT THROTTLE:
Push down on the foot throttle to increase the
engine speed. Release to decrease the engine
speed.
BD08A484 Figure 30
WARNING: Always lock the service brake 4. SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL LOCK: (Shown
pedals together before you travel on roads or ENGAGED)
when you operate the machine in 3rd or 4th
gear. See the instructions in this manual for Move the lever up and slide the locking pin all the
brake pedals. Death or serious injury may way to the right into the lock ENGAGED position.
result if you do not follow these procedures. Move the lever up and slide the locking pin all the
Figure 29
way to the left into the lock DISENGAGED
position.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-9

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LOADER CONTROL LEVER

A
1
F B 1

G E
D

2
C

BD07J088 / BD07J089 Figure 31

1. LOADER CONTROL LEVER
2. LIFT ARM AND BUCKET INSTRUCTIONAL DECAL LOCATION

B9410261 Figure 32
LIFT ARM AND BUCKET CONTROLS:
A. FLOAT: Push the Loader Control Lever all the E. DUMP: Move the Loader Control Lever to the
way fo r wa r d , p a s t t h e L OW E R c o n t r o l Right from Neutral to dump the bucket.
position. When in FLOAT, the bucket can
F. RETURN-To-Dig: After the bucket is dumped,
fo l l o w t h e l eve l o f t h e g r o u n d w i t h o u t
move the control to ROLLBACK and FLOAT.
movement of the control lever.
When the bucket is at the height selected, pull
B. LOWER: Push the Loader Control Lever the control back to HOLD.
Forward, from Neutral to move the lift arms
G. HOLD - NEUTRAL: The loader lift arms and
down.
bucket stop moving when the control lever is in
C. RAISE: Pull the Loader Control Lever back HOLD. When released, this control will return
from neutral to raise the lift arms. to HOLD automatically. You must manually
move this control from FLOAT to HOLD.
D. ROLLBACK: Move the Loader Control Lever
to the Left from Neutral to rollback the bucket.

3-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED

SWITCHES A

1 A

B
B A

B
BDO7J087 Figure 33
1. 4 IN 1 BUCKET CONTROL SWITCH:
A. BUCKET OPEN:
Roll the switch forward to open the bucket.
Release the switch to stop.
B. BUCKET CLOSED:
BS07N606 Figure 34
Roll the switch back or down, to close the bucket.
Release the switch to stop. The 4 IN 1 bucket control switch may be adjusted to
activate a detent position for specific attachments or
working conditions.
To activate the detent switch see page 6-13 in the
Maintenance Chapter of this manual.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-11

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED

4. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH:
SWITCHES
To engage the differential lock use the
following procedure:
A. Before engaging the differential
lock make sure neither rear wheel
2 is spinning freely.
3
B. Press and hold the differential
lock switch, located on the loader
control lever.
4 To disengage the differential lock,
release the differential lock switch.
BS98M066 Figure 37
NOTE: The differential lock will release automatically
when the load is removed.

Figure 35

2. CLUTCH CUTOUT BUTTON:

Push the clutch cutout button to allow the
engine to increase speed and supply the
loader with more hydraulic oil for greater
loader power and faster control function.
When you push the clutch cutout button,
the transmission is disengaged from the
drive wheels. Release the clutch cutout
button to engage the transmission
power. The machine can move freely
when the clutch cutout button is pushed.
If required, use the brake to stop the
machine.
BC00B098 Figure 36
3. TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN SWITCH:
Press this button while in 2nd gear and the
Powershift transmission will shift down to 1st
gear. Press the button again and the Powershift
transmission will shift up to 2nd gear.

3-12 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

Figure 38
1. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2. PARKING BRAKE LAMP ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH IMPORTANT: This machine Parking Brake is Spring

Applied Hydraulic Released (SAHR). The Park brake
1 is applied if the engine is stopped.

BD08A485 Figure 41
Figure 39 2. PARKING BRAKE LAMP ON INSTRUMENT
1. PARK BRAKE SWITCH CLUSTER

1. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: The Parking Brake is always engaged on start up,
regardless of the position the Parking Brake Switch is
Push the Park symbol or the upper
left in. On start up, cycle the Parking Brake Switch to
portion of this switch to set the park
release the Parking Brake.
brake.
NOTE: A warning alarm will sound if you shift the
Push the lower portion of the switch to
Direction Control Lever into FORWARD or
release the SAHR brakes.
REVERSE while the parking brake is engaged, and
On start up, the switch will have to be the P symbol will appear on the instrument cluster.
cycled from P to O, regardless of the
position the switch was in at start up.
Figure 40

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-13

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

5
3

BD03H065 Figure 42

3. AIR CONDITIONING
TEMPERATURE SWITCH:
If equipped, turn this rotary knob
clockwise to decrease the temperature in
the cab. Turn completely clockwise for
the coldest setting. Turn completely
counterclockwise for the OFF position.
BC00B112 Figure 43

4. BLOWER FAN SWITCH:

Turn the switch clockwise to increase the BD03F026 Figure 46
air flow in the cab. Turn the switch HEATER COOLANT SHUTOFF VALVE
counterclockwise to the OFF position to
Be sure the engine is shut off and cool when making
stop the fan.
the following adjustments.
BC00B127 Figure 44
During warm weather, turn the heater coolant shutoff
5. HEATER SWITCH: valve clockwise to stop the flow of hot coolant to the
Turn the heat control clockwise to heater.
increase the temperature in the cab. Tu r n t h e h e a t e r c o o l a n t s h u t o f f v a l ve
Turn the heat control counterclockwise to counterclockwise when cold weather begins.
decrease the temperature.
BC00B128 Figure 45

3-14 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

BP00G019 Figure 47

6. KEY SWITCH: 4 POSITION 7. 4WD FRONT AXLE ACTIVATION

A. ACC - Turn the key SWITCH:
counterclockwise from the B or The front drive axle is engaged and
OFF position to ACC, to give disengaged by a rocker switch. To
power to the accessories. engage the front drive axle, push the
B. OFF - To stop the engine, turn the rocker switch emblem. To disengage the
key to the OFF position. After the front drive axle, push the opposite end of
engine has stopped, remove the the rocker switch.
key. BS98M067 Figure 49

C. ON - Turn the key clockwise to the NOTE: When the front drive axle is engaged,
ON pos ition. There will be a operate the machine only in first or second gear. It is
momentary delay as the system recommended that you disengage the front drive axle
wakes up. before you operate on a hard surface or in third or
fourth gear.
D. START - Turn the key completely
clockwise to the START position
to actuate the starter motor. After
the engine starts release the key.
The key will return automatically
to the ON position.
Figure 48
NOTE: Before you start the engine, check the
condition of the warning lamps. Use the voltmeter to
check the condition of the battery(ies).
NOTE: Allow two or three seconds with the key
switch at ON before cranking the engine on
machines with the Advanced Instrument Cluster.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-15

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

BP00G019 / Figure 50
8.RIDE CONTROL SWITCH: When the ride control is activated the loader down
R i d e C o n t r o l i s a fe a t u r e t h a t pressure is limited to the weight of the loader and the
improves the machine ride over all attachment (bucket). The weight of the loader
types of terrain with either an empty attachment (bucket) is hydraulically cushioned during
BC00B094
or loaded bucket. Ride Control will transport which is a normal condition of the ride
reduce fore and aft pitching motion control.
during transport and material hauling operations, Ride control should not be used for fine grading with
while allowing increased productivity and operator the loader bucket, during backhoe operation, or when
comfort. It also reduces shock loads to the machine. precise placement of the loader is required.
If equipped, to engage Ride Control, lower the loader To test the ride control refer to the Service manual.
bucket to or near the ground line. Push the rocker
switch emblem, the green switch lamp will illuminate.
WARNING: If the ride control is turned on,
There can be a slight loader arm drop when the ride
with the key switch in the ON or ACC.
control is activated.
position, the loader arms can drop slightly,
To disengage, push the opposite end of the rocker due to the hydraulic accumulator.
switch, the green switch lamp will go out. M511 Figure 51

3-16 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

3 4 5
2
1

BD05C037 Figure 52
With the key switch in the ON position and the engine NOT running the Air Filter Restriction, Hydraulic Oil Filter,
Alternator, and Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamps are illuminated.
When the key switch is first turned to the ON position, the Air Filter Restriction Warning Lamp, Hydraulic Oil Filter
Warning Lamp, Parking Brake Indicator Lamp and Air Conditioning System Pressure Indicator Lamp, will illuminate
for 3 seconds for a bulb self test. The engine pre-heat lamp will remain on, as necessary, depending on the
ambient temperature.

1. DRIVING LAMPS INDICATOR: 4. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

This green indicator lamp illuminates WARNING LAMP:
when the driving lamp switch is in the This red warning lamp illuminates if, with
ON position. the engine running there is no or low oil
BS98M062 Figure 53 pressure in the engine. Do not run the
engine if this warning lamp illuminates. A
2. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM continuous audible alarm will sound if
PRESSURE INDICATOR LAMP: this condition exists.
This yellow indicator illuminates when BS99D060 Figure 56
the air conditioner has stopped due to
5. ALTERNATOR WARNING LAMP:
refrigerant pressures that are too high or
too low. This red warning lamp illuminates if, with
BC00B112 Figure 54
the engine running, the alternator is not
charging the battery.
3. PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR BS98M032 Figure 57
LAMP:
This red lamp will illuminate when the
parking brake is set.
BS96H049 Figure 55

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-17

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

6 7

10

9 8

BD05C037 Figure 58

6. HYDRAULIC FILTER WARNING 9. ENGINE COOLANT

LAMP: TEMPERATURE GAUGE:
This red indicator lamp illuminates when, The engine coolant temperature gauge
with the engine running the hydraulic indicates the coolant temperature of the
filter is restricted and requires service engine. The temperature of the coolant
BC00B113 Figure 59 is normal when the gauge needle is in
the green area of the gauge. If the gauge
7. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION needle goes into the red area a
WARNING LAMP: continuous audible alarm will sound,
This warning lamp illuminates when, with stop the engine and check the level of
the engine running, the air filter element the coolant in the coolant reservoir, or
is restricted and requires service. A one check for debris on the radiator/oil
second audible alarm will activate per cooler, or for a thermostat that does not
key cycle. Replace the primary and operate correctly.
secondary filters if this lamp illuminates. BS96H053 Figure 62
BS98M026 Figure 60
10. OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE:
8. LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING (TORQUE CONVERTER)
LAMP: The oil temperature gauge indicates the
This warning lamp illuminates when the oil temperature of the torque converter.
fuel level is low. A one second audible The temperature of the oil is normal
alarm will sound per key cycle. when the gauge needle is in the green
BS98M034 Figure 61 area of the gauge. If the gauge needle
goes into the red area, move the
direction control lever to the NEUTRAL
position and run the engine a full throttle.
If this procedure does not reduce the
temperature of the oil, check the oil level
and check for obstruction in the radiator
and oil cooler.
BS98M028 Figure 63

3-18 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

13
14

12
11

BD05C037 Figure 64

11. ENGINE HOURMETER: 14. ENGINE PRE-HEAT INDICATOR

The hourmeter shows the hours the LAMP:
engine has run. The digit all the way to Turn the key switch to ON. When the
the right shows tenths of an hour. incoming engine air needs to be
BS96H096 Figure 65
preheated, due to cold temperatures, the
lamp will illuminate. Wait until the
12. TACHOMETER: indicator lamp goes off before turning the
The tachometer shows the engine speed key switch to the start position.
in revolutions per minute (RPM). Each BC02N191 Figure 68
tick mark on the gauge is equal to 100
n/min RPM. It is recommended that the engine
be run in the green area of the gauge
BS03H015 Figure 66

13. VOLTMETER GAUGE:

This gauge shows the condition of the
electrical system. The electrical system
voltage is normal when the gauge
needle is in the green area of the gauge
(11 to 15.3 volts) when the key switch is
in the ON position. If the gauge needle is
in the lower red area, the charge of the
battery is too low or the alternator is not
charging enough. Damage to the battery
can result if this condition continues.
BS98M032 Figure 67

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-19

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

5
4
3

BD07M320 Figure 69
580 Super M, Super M +, 590 Super M and Super M + models are equipped with a Vehicle Control Module, which
monitors machine functions and controls. This Vehicle Control Module sends information to the Operator and
Service Technican by activating Warning Lamps, Audible Alarms and displaying information on the Dot Matrix
Display (A) on machines so equipped. On start up the eleven lamps above, light briefly while the audible alarm
sounds for approximately 2 seconds. After the initial wake up, the Park Lamp, and Engine Oil Pressure Lamp will
remain on until the machine is started and these functions are cycled.
On start up with the Advanced Cluster the operator should turn the key to ON wait for two seconds, allowing the
system to self check and wake up, before cranking and starting the machine.

4. RED STOP ENGINE LAMP:

1. ENGINE FAULT LAMP:
This red lamp, and appropriate symbol
This yellow lamp will illuminate when a will illuminate with a continuos audible
machine fault has been detected. A one alarm if:
second audible alarm will sound per key
cycle. engine coolant temperature is too high
BC00B291 Figure 70 engine oil pressure is too low or too high
2. DRIVING LAMP INDICATOR: transmission oil pressure is too low
This green lamp indicator illuminates
transmission oil temperature is too low
when the driving lamp switch is in the
ON position. brake fluid level is too low
BS98M062 Figure 71 BC00B290 Figure 73

3. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE IMPORTANT: You must STOP the machine if this
WARNING LAMP: lamp and audible alarm sounds. The condition must
This red warning lamp illuminates if, with be serviced.
the engine running there is no or low oil
5. ALTERNATOR WARNING LAMP:
pressure in the engine. Do Not Run the
engine if this lamp illuminates. The This red warning lamp illuminates if, with
audible alarm will sound continuously if the engine running, the alternator is not
this condition exists and until the charging the battery.
condition has been serviced. BS98M032 Figure 74
BS99D060 Figure 72
3-20 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA
 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

6
7
8
9

10

11

Figure 75

6. PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR 9. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

LAMP: PRESSURE INDICATOR LAMP:
This red lamp will illuminate when the This yellow indicator illuminates when
machine parking brakes have been set. the air conditioner has stopped due to
BS96H049 refrigerant pressures that are too high or
too low.
7. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION
BC00B112 Figure 78
WARNING LAMP:
This red warning lamp illuminates and a 10. ENGINE PRE-HEAT INDICATOR
one second audible alarm sounds when, LAMP:
with the engine running, the air filter Turn the key switch to ON. When the
element is restricted and requires incoming engine air needs to be
service. Replace the primary and pre-heated, due to cold temperatures,
secondary filters if this lamp illuminates. the lamp will illuminate. Wait until the
BS98M026 Figure 76 indicator lamp goes off before turning the
key switch to the start position.
8. HYDRAULIC FILTER WARNING
BC02N191 Figure 79
LAMP:
This red indicator lamp illuminates when, 11. FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP:
with the engine running the hydraulic This warning lamp illuminates when the
filter is restricted and requires service. fuel level is low.
BC00B113 Figure 77
BS98M034 Figure 80

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-21

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

BD07M320 Figure 81
A. DOT MATRIX DISPLAY

3
1

2 4

BD08A279-01 Figure 82
On start up the Dot Matrix Display will show this main
screen graphic along with the machine hours. Figure 83
Use these two rocker switches to move through the
menu.
1. ESCAPE - Use this diamond portion of the
switch to return to the previous top menu or
escape back to the main screen.
2. ENTER - Use this portion of the switch to enter
selected choices and store them to memory.
3. UP ARROW - Use this portion of the switch to
move UP through the menu.
4. DOWN ARROW - Use this portion of the switch
to move DOWN through the menu.

3-22 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Basic Menu Selections Screens

The following graphic are display screens, in the
order they rotate through.

Figure 86
SERVICE INTERVAL SCREEN
This screen guides the operator to the ser vice
BD08A279-01 Figure 84 interval selector. The operator may customize the
MAIN SCREEN
service intervals to display on the screen at key up.
From the above Main Screen, push the enter button Example: Heavy Service Hours are 1000 hours to
(90 degree arrow). 500 at 100 hour increments. The Service Interval
Screen may be programmed to display at the
operator’s choice. On key up the Service Interval will
display when those hours are reached.
Light Ser vice Hours are 500 to 50 at 50 hour
increments.
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

BD08A280-01 Figure 85
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIMMER SCREEN
The dimmer screen menu shows the operator which
incremental value the cluster is set at. Four bars are
maximum screen brightness.
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen. Figure 87
STORED FAULT CODE SCREEN
This screen will display and alert the operator or
service technican with codes, occurrences and hours
that occurrences were logged.
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-23

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Figure 88
ENGINE PRE HEAT PRESENCE SCREEN
Figure 91
This screen displays the activation of the engine SOFTWARE PART NUMBER SCREEN
pre-heat system. The system is on Select or
This screen verifies machine software.
Deselect.
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Figure 89
ENGINE SPEED SCREEN Figure 92

This screen directs the operator or service technican BRAKE ENABLE IDLE SELECTION
to the idle increment screen for Idle and Max Idle This screen verifies the brake enable idle selection.
adjustments. Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Basic Menu Selection Screens: Continued

Figure 93
THROTTLE SENSITIVITY SCREEN
This screen displays the throttle sensitivity setting.
Figure 90 The operator may adjust sensitivity from 1 to 3.
HARDWARE PART NUMBER SCREEN
This screen verifies machine hardware. Push the DOWN arrow, from this last screen, and the
Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen. beginning or Main screen will appear.

3-24 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

To Change The Value Of The Cluster Brightness: To Deselect The Brake Enable Idle:
The electronic hand throttle setting will be overridden
and the engine will default to idle if:
• the machine service brakes are activated
• the seat is turned
In certain work situations and cycles the operator
may choose to override this feature by de-activating
the Brake Enable Idle.
The machine will default to, activating the Brake
Enable Idle at every key cycle.

Figure 94
1. Move through the screens until the Dimmer
Screen, shown above, is reached.
2. Push the ENTER portion of the switch again to
reach the screen below.

Figure 96
1. Move through the screens until the Brake Enable
Idle Symbol, shown above, is reached.

BD08A281-01 Figure 95
When the above screen is on display touch ENTER
again and the symbol will flash.
Push the UP arrow to increment UP.
Push the DOWN arrow to increment DOWN.
Push ENTER to save.
Figure 97
Figure 98

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-25

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

SEAT SWITCH ALARM SYSTEM

This alarm will sound when the operator rotates the seat from the driving position towards the backhoe position and
leaves the Direction Control Lever in gear.
Rotating the seat, with the engine running, will also place the engine into idle on machines with Electronic Hand
Throttles.
A warning decal on the machine, repeated in this operators manual with additional operating instructions, requires
the operator to take certain precautions before operating the backhoe. The seat switch alarm is an additional
warning. The alarm will sound if the seat is rotated approximately 15 to 20 degrees from the straight forward
position.
To make sure the system is working, the operator must know that the same alarm will also sound if the parking
brake is set and the direction control lever is in forward or reverse.
Seat Alarm Test Procedure:
1. The operator must be in the seat in the driving position with the seat belt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Park the machine on a level surface in a clean area. Make sure all other persons are clear of the area.
4. Make sure the parking brake is OFF, and the transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL with the loader bucket on
the ground.
5. Put your foot on the service brake and keep it there.
6. Move the direction control lever to the FORWARD position and turn the seat approximately 15 to 20 degrees.
The buzzer will sound. The same procedure is repeated for REVERSE. The alarm and also the backup alarm
will sound. This will confirm if the seat switch alarm system is operating.

3-26 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LEFT REAR CONSOLE CONTROLS

2. REAR WORK LAMP SWITCH:

2 3
4 Push the symbol side of this switch to
activate the rear work lamps. Push the
1 blank portion of the switch to turn the
work lamps OFF.
BS98M061

3. REAR WIPER SWITCH:

The rear wiper switch is a three position
switch.
5 Push the rocker switch emblem to the
first position to turn the rear wiper to
LOW.
Push the rocker switch emblem to the
BD08A300 Figure 99 second position to turn the rear wiper to
HIGH.
1. ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE CONTROL:
SM AND SM+ MACHINES Push the opposite end of the rocker
Rotate the throttle control clockwise to increase switch to turn the rear wiper OFF.
the engine speed. Figure 101

Rotate the throttle control counterclockwise to 4. REAR WINDOW WASHER

decrease the engine speed. When the foot SWITCH:
throttle is used and released, the engine will Push the rocker switch emblem to
default to the speed this throttle control is set at. activate the rear window washer.
The Electronic Hand Throttle will default to IDLE, Release the rocker switch to stop the
if: rear window washer.
• The Brake Pedal Is Pushed Figure 102

• The Seat Is Turned Around WARNING: When you operate the

backhoe, use the hand throttle to control the
1 engine speed. You can have an accident if
you use the hand throttle for any other
operation.
Figure 103

5. HORN SWITCH: MECHANICAL

CONTROL MACHINES
Push the symbol end of this switch to
2 activate the horn. The horn will remain
activated as long as the symbol end of
the switch is pushed. Release the switch
and it will spring to the OFF position.
BS98M064 Figure 104

BD03H032 Figure 100

1. PUSH OUTWARD TO INCREASE ENGINE SPEED
2. PULL IN TO DECREASE SPEED

1. MECHANICAL HAND THROTTLE:

Push the hand throttle outward to increase the
engine speed.
Pull the hand throttle back toward the inside of
the machine to decrease the engine speed.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-27

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BD08A300 Figure 105

6. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER

SWITCHES:
Push the top of both rocker switches to
disengage or retract the backhoe quick
coupler pins.
Push the bottom of both rocker switches
to engage or extend the backhoe quick
coupler pins.

BC00G015 Figure 106

3-28 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROLS

2
2

BD04C134 Figure 107

BACKHOE CONTROL TOWER WITH STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROLS
1. BACKHOE BOOM LATCH RELEASE LEVER
2. SWING PEDALS

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-29

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING

B902392J Figure 108

1. LEFT SWING PEDAL 2. STABILIZERS

3. BUCKET 4. DIPPER
5. BOOM 6. RIGHT SWING PEDAL

Figure 109

3-30 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

EXTENDAHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING

B902394J Figure 110

1. LEFT SWING PEDAL 2. STABILIZERS

3. BUCKET 4. DIPPER
5. BOOM 6. RIGHT SWING PEDAL
7. EXTENDAHOE

Figure 111

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-31

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING

BD05C038 Figure 112

BACKHOE CONTROL TOWER - BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING

1. EXTENDABLE DIPPER FOOT CONTROL PEDAL

2. AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC FOOT CONTROL PEDAL

3-32 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING

Figure 113

1. BOOM AND SWING 2. LEFT STABILIZER

3. RIGHT STABILIZER 4. BUCKET AND DIPPER

Figure 114

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-33

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING AND EXTENDABLE DIPPER

B902395J Figure 115

1. BOOM AND SWING 2. LEFT STABILIZER

3. RIGHT STABILIZER 4. BUCKET AND DIPPER
5. EXTENDABLE DIPPER FOOT CONTROL PEDAL

Figure 116

3-34 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE WITH PILOT CONTROLS

4 5 7 8
10
9
3 6

2 11

14 14 12

13
1

BD03H064 Figure 117

LEFT AND RIGHT PILOT CONTROL TOWERS

1. LEFT AND RIGHT STABILIZER CONTROLS 2. LEFT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB
3. LEFT CONTROL LEVER 4. UNI DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC SWITCH
5. HORN SWITCH 6. RIGHT CONTROL LEVER
7. EXTENDAHOE RETRACT SWITCH 8. EXTENDAHOE EXTEND SWITCH
9. ONE TOUCH IDLE 10. TOWER FORWARD AND REARWARD CONTROL
11. RIGHT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB 12. PILOT CONTROL ACTIVATION SWITCH
13. BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN SELECTOR 14. LEFT AND RIGHT TOWER TIP CONTROLS

Figure 118

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-35

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LEFT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

WARNING: Pilot Controlled machines are

equipped with two backhoe control function
patterns. Check control functions before
2
operating this machine. Failure to check
control pattern before operating can cause
unexpected machine movement, death or
serious injury.
Figure 120

BD07J091 Figure 119 Figure 121

1. LEFT TOWER:

2. LEFT CONTROL LEVER:

T h i s l eve r c o n t r o l s t h e B o o m a n d S w i n g
functions when in Backhoe Control Pattern 1.
4
When in Backhoe Control Pattern 2, this lever
controls the Dipper and Swing functions. The
Backhoe Control Pattern Switch will illuminate
when in pattern 2. 5
The Backhoe Control Pattern Switch is located
on the right Pilot Control Tower.

3. UNI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC

SWITCH:

4. HORN BUTTON:
Push the button to activate the horn. Release to
stop.

5. BI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC

SWITCHES: Figure 122

3-36 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

LEFT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

8
9

Figure 125
8. LEFT STABILIZER CONTROL:
Pull rearward to bring the stabilizer up or push
forward to lower.
Stabilizer Auto Up:
Pull the switch all the way back momentarily past
the detent position. Release the switch and the
stabilizer will automatically raise to the full
transport position.
BD04C136 Figure 123
To cancel Auto Up, push the switch up or down.
6. LEFT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB:
Use this knob to adjust the height of the wrist rest
9. RIGHT STABILIZER CONTROL:
for operator comfort.
Pull rearward to bring the stabilizer up or push
forward to lower.
Stabilizer Auto Up:
7 Pull the switch all the way back momentarily past
the detent position. Release the switch and the
stabilizer will automatically raise to the full
transport position.
To cancel Auto Up, push the switch up or down.
NOTE: The Auto Up function allows the operator to
automatically bring the stabilizers up into the
transport position much like the auto down feature on
car power windows.

BD05C039 Figure 124

7. LEFT TOWER TIP ADJUSTMENT KNOB:
The tower tip adjustment knob is located on the
backhoe side of the tower. Tur n the knob
counterclockwise and tip the upper part of the
tower into position. Turn the knob clockwise to
lock the position.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-37

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

4
2 3

DSC3620 Figure 127

3. EXTENDAHOE RETRACT BUTTON:
If equipped, this button activates the Extendahoe
retract function. Push and hold the button to
retract. Release the button to stop. This switch is
propor tional. Push harder and retract will
function faster.
BD07J092 Figure 126
1. RIGHT TOWER: 4. EXTENDAHOE EXTEND BUTTON:
If equipped, this button activates the Extendahoe
2. RIGHT CONTROL LEVER: extend function. Push and hold the button to
extend. Release the button to stop. This switch is
This lever controls the Dipper and Bucket
propor tional. Push harder and extend will
functions when in Backhoe Control Pattern 1.
function faster.
When in Backhoe Control Pattern 2 this lever
controls the Boom and Bucket. The Backhoe
Control Pattern Switch will illuminate when in 5. ONE TOUCH IDLE BUTTON:
pattern 2. Press this button to reduce the engine speed to
idle. Press the switch again to restore the engine
speed.

WARNING: Pilot control machines are

equipped with two backhoe control function
patterns. Check control functions before
operating this machine. Failure to check
control pattern before operating can cause
unexpected machine movement, death or
serious injury.
M956 Figure 128

3-38 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

Figure 130

BD07J094 Figure 129 C

6. LEFT AND RIGHT TOWER ADJUSTMENT
HANDLES:
The Pilot Control Towers may be adjusted
forward and rearward for operator comfor t.
Squeeze the handles together and adjust as
B
necessary. Release the handles to secure the
towers into the desired position. A

7. RIGHT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB:

Turn the knob counterclockwise to adjust the
Wrist Rest and tighten by turning clockwise.
Figure 131
9. BACKHOE AND STABILIZER ACTIVATION
8. RIGHT TOWER TIP ADJUSTMENT KNOB:
SWITCH:
NOT SHOWN
This three position switch activates the controls
The tower tip adjustment knob is located on the
for backhoe operation.
backhoe side of the tower. Tur n the knob
counterclockwise and tip the upper part of the A. Backhoe Hydraulic Controls - OFF
tower into position. Turn the knob clockwise to B. Stabilizers Only Activated
lock the position.
C. All Backhoe Controls Activated - The symbol
por tion of the switch will illuminate when
activated.
IMPORTANT: When turning the pilot control switch to
ON there may be a momentary delay of less than 1/2
second before being able to operate the Stabilizers,
Extendahoe, (if equipped), or Bi-Directional Auxiliary,
(if equipped).
If the operator attempts to operate any of these
functions sooner than the 1/2 second delay, they
WILL NOT OPERATE until the power switch is cycled
OFF and back ON again.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-39

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

10

Figure 134
To change backhoe control patterns it is necessary to
Figure 132 use two hands. This feature helps to prevent the
accidental switching of patterns.
See the backhoe patterns on the following two
pages.

Figure 133

10. BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN SWITCH:

This switch allows the operator to select from two
backhoe patterns. Pattern 1 or Pattern 2
To change switch positions, push the orange
locking tab up, towards the center of the switch,
to release the lock.

3-40 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 1

1 2

BD03H064 Figure 135

1. BOOM AND SWING 2. DIPPER AND BUCKET 3. INSTRUCTIONAL DECAL

Figure 136

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-41

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 2

1 2

BD03H064 Figure 137

1. DIPPER AND SWING 2. BOOM AND BUCKET 3. INSTRUCTIONAL DECAL

Figure 138

3-42 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC ATTACHMENT CONTROL FOR BACKHOES

If equipped, these options allow the operator to install
hydraulically actuated attachments on the dipper
when the bucket is removed.

BD00G086 Figure 139

1. UNI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL
PEDAL

Push the pedal for uni-directional flow to the

hydraulic attachment.

Figure 140
2. BI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL
LEVER

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-43

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

SEAT BELTS
50 mm (2 Inch) and 76 mm (3 inch) Wide Belts
Due to local regulations, 76 mm (3 inch) belts are
provided on some machines.

Figure 141
1. RETRACTING END OF THE SEAT BELT
1. Fasten the retracting end of the belt into the
left-hand or buckle end.

Figure 142
2. RED RELEASE BUTTON
2. To release the seat belt, push the red release
button on the buckle.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the belt end and buckle are
securely fastened.

WARNING: You are protected by the ROPS

system on this machine (Roll-Over Protective
Structure). The seat belt is an important part
of the ROPS system. Before you operate this
machine, always fasten the seat belt. If the
machine rolls over and you DO NOT have
the seat belt fastened, you can be crushed by
the ROPS or the machine.
Figure 143
For seat belt maintenance see page 6-7.

3-44 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

SEATS
STANDARD PEDESTAL SEAT

WARNING: An accident or sudden machine movement can cause injury or death. Always fasten the seat belt
and adjust the seat before you start the engine.
SB053 Figure 144

2
3
1

BD05E126 Figure 145

1. HEIGHT CONTROL
2. FORWARD / REARWARD CONTROL
3. SWIVEL CONTROL

1. HEIGHT CONTROL:
Pull the height control lever up and adjust the 3. SWIVEL CONTROL:
height of the seat. Release the control lever and Lift the lever to rotate from the normal driving
make sure the seat is locked in position. position to the backhoe operation position or
from the backhoe operation position to the
2 3 normal driving position.

BD053125 Figure 146

2. FORWARD / REARWARD CONTROL:
Lift the lever to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the control lever and make
sure the seat is locked in position.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-45

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SEAT

WARNING: An accident or sudden machine movement can cause injury or death. Always fasten the seat belt
and adjust the seat before you start the engine.
SB053 Figure 147
The operators seat can be raised, lowered, moved forward and rearward, and can be turned around to operate the
backhoe or the loader. You can also adjust the armrests, seat cushion and backrest. For added operator comfort
there is lumbar support adjustment and a weight adjustment for ride firmness.

BD05E510 Figure 148

1. SWIVEL CONTROL: 3. BACKREST TILT ADJUSTMENT
Lift the lever to rotate from the normal CONTROL:
d r i v i n g p o s i t i o n t o t h e b a ck h o e Sitting in the seat, this lever is located
operation position or from the backhoe on the left side of the seat. Raise the
operation position to the normal driving lever and tilt the seat backrest until it is
position. comfortable for you. Releasing the lever will lock it in
place.
2. FORWARD/REARWARD AND
SWIVEL CONTROL:
Lift the lever to move the seat forward or
rearward. Release the control lever and
make sure the seat is locked in position.

BD05C024 Figure 150

4. HEIGHT / WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL:
Use the hand crank on the control wheel to turn the
height/weight adjustment control knob either
clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease)
BD05C022 Figure 149
to adjust the seats height and the suspension
firmness.

3-46 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

AIR SUSPENSION SEAT

The operators seat can be raised, lowered, moved
forward and rearward, and can be turned around to
operate the backhoe or the loader. You can also
adjust the armrests, seat cushion and backrest. For
added operator comfort there is lumbar support
adjustment and a weight adjustment for r ide
firmness.
1. ARMREST CONTROLS: (1 EACH SIDE)
The ar mrests may be folded completely up or
completely down. The low or bottom armrest position
may be adjusted to tip up. Turn the control knob
clockwise to raise the arm rest. To lower the arm rest,
turn the knob counterclockwise.
NOTE: See figure 152, this page.
BD05C025 Figure 151
5. LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL:
Turn the control wheel down or clockwise to increase
the lumbar support. To decrease the lumbar support
turn the knob up or counterclockwise.

BD05C057 Figure 153

2. SWIVEL CONTROL:
Lift the lever to rotate from the normal
d r i v i n g p o s i t i o n t o t h e b a ck h o e
operation position or from the backhoe
operation position to the nor mal
BD05C026 Figure 152 driving position.

6. ARMREST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: (1 EACH

SIDE)
The ar mrests may be folded completely up or
completely down. The low or bottom armrest position
may be adjusted to tip up. Turn the control knob
clockwise to raise the arm rest. To lower the arm rest,
turn the knob counterclockwise.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-47

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

3
BK97K178 Figure 156
6. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH:
BD05C057 Figure 154 Press the top of the switch to raise the
seat.
3. FORWARD/REARWARD CONTROL: Press the bottom of the switch to lower
Pull the control lever up and move the the seat.
seat forward or rearward. To turn the
seat, pull the control lever up and turn
the seat. The seat can be rotated when
in any forward or rearward position. Adjust the seat
as required and release the control.

7
4

BK97K184 Figure 157

7. SEAT LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT:

5 Rotate the lumbar adjustment control
c l o ck w i s e t o i n c r e a s e t h e l u m b a r
support. Rotate the adjustment control
BK97K182 Figure 155 c o u n t e r c l o ck w i s e t o d e c r e a s e t h e
support.
4. SEAT BACKREST ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL:
Lift the lever up to release the backrest. Lean
rearward or forward to adjust the backrest
position.

5. RIDE FIRMNESS ADJUSTMENT

CONTROL:
Rotate the control knob
counterclockwise for a firmer ride. Rotate
to the mid-point for travel.

3-48 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

CAB CONTROLS
CAB AIR LOUVERS
The air louvers in this cab are adjustable and can be completely closed. Move the two bars in each louver to the
center to stop air flow. Move each bar outward to start air flow.
.

1 1

2
2

BD00H002 Figure 158

1. DEFROST LOUVERS:
There are two louvers in the front of the cab and two in the rear of the cab. To get maximum air flow, close the
recirculation grill in the center of the cab and the two main louvers by the center posts.
2. MAIN LOUVERS:
The two louvers by the center posts are used to direct the flow of air for heating and cooling.
3. RECIRCULATION GRILL:
The grill between the main louvers is used for recirculation of the cab air. To get maximum pressure in the cab,
close the recirculation grill. To get maximum heat in the winter and maximum cooling in the summer, open the
recirculation grill.

4
4

BD00F051 Figure 159 BD00F052 Figure 160

4. CAB LOWER VENTS:

These vents in the center front of the cab are used to direct the flow of air for heating and cooling. To get maximum
air flow from the lower vents, close the overhead louvers and grill.
NOTE: During some conditions, it is possible to have ice on the air conditioning core. Ice can be caused by
operating at LOW blower speed and MAXIMUM cold setting of the temperature control. It is best to operate the
MEDIUM or HIGH speed setting of the blower and center range of the temperature control. If ice does block the
core, you will feel a reduction of air flow in the cab. Close the recirculation louver, turn the temperature control to
OFF and run the blower at HIGH speed. Another cause of ice can be a restricted air filter in the cab.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-49

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

DOME LAMP SWITCH WINDOW LATCH

1
2
BD00H002 Figure 161 BD00F044 Figure 164
1. DOME LAMP SWITCH 1. LATCH AND LATCH HANDLE
The dome lamps switch has three positions. 2. PARTIAL WINDOW HOLD OPEN (SHOWN IN STORAGE
POSITION)
1. AUTO ON - When the switch is in this position Push the tab to release and open the window.
the dome lamp comes ON when the door is
opened. When the door is closed the dome lamp
is OFF.
2. OFF - When the switch is in this position the
dome lamp is always OFF.
3. ON - When the switch is in this position the dome
lamp is always ON. 3
DOOR LATCH

BD00F043 Figure 165

1 3. PARTIAL WINDOW HOLD OPEN (SHOWN IN USE)

NOTE: Always return the hold open rod to the

STORED position when not in use.
IMPORTANT: Do Not transport machine on trailer at
highway speeds with the windows in the partial open
position. Damage to cab windows could occur.

BD00F021 Figure 162

1. PULL UP TO OPEN DOOR.

WINDOW RETAINER RELEASE

BD00F025 Figure 163

1. PULL UP TO RELEASE WINDOW.
Push the window completely back to hold the window
in the OPEN position.

3-50 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

REAR WINDOWS COAT HOOK

BD00F063 Figure 170

BD03H048 Figure 166 1. COAT HOOK

1. ALL WINDOWS FULL DOWN REAR VIEW MIRROR

The rear windows in the cab have four positions:

1. All closed - top window up and bottom window

1/2 up.
2. Top window up and bottom window full down.
3. Top window 1/2 down and bottom window full
down.
4. Both windows full down.

WARNING: UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT BD00F054 Figure 171

HAZARD: Before adjusting windows Turn RADIO READY PACKAGE
Off Backhoe Control System.
The radio ready package includes the radio mounting
Figure 167
box, wiring harness, speakers and antenna. Radio
To raise a window, use both handles and raise the not included.
window. To lower a window raise the window with
both handles, push down on the latch bars, and lower
the window. Use the handles to raise or lower the
windows.
1

WARNING: The window can interfere with

pilot control levers Make sure window
adjustment is locked into position before
actuating the hydraulics.
M955 Figure 168
BD00F035 Figure 172
1. RADIO BOX MOUNTING LOCATION
2

2 2

BD05C045 Figure 169

BD00F053 Figure 173
1. REAR WINDOW HANDLE (ONE EACH SIDE) 2. RADIO SPEAKERS

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-51

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

VANDAL LOCKUP KIT FOR RIGHT SIDE SWING LOCK TRANSPORT PIN
INSTRUMENT CONSOLE

BD00F139 Figure 174

LOCKUP IN STORAGE POSITION

BD08A462 Figure 177

1. SWING LOCK TRANSPORT PIN IN THE TRANSPORT
POSITION
When the backhoe is placed in the transport position
this pin should be installed, as shown.

2
BD00F140 Figure 175
LOCKUP IN LOCKED POSITION

BD00F040 Figure 178

2. SWING LOCK TRANSPORT PIN IN THE CAB STORAGE
POSITION

BD00F023 Figure 176

Two 12 volt accessory outlets are located on the right
side panel of the instrument console.

3-52 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTES

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 3-53

 CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

3-54 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Chapter 4
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

INITIAL PROCEDURES AND RUN IN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

LOADER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
BACKHOE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
SAFETY WHEN YOU WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
STABILIZER PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
BEFORE YOU DIG WITH THE BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
INCREASED ROTATION BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
CASE BACKHOE BUCKET QUICK COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 4-1

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
This Chapter explains operation procedures for the machine and components. Run-In-Periods, Pre-start
Procedures, Hot and Cold start procedures and some Work Site Operations. This chapter explains multi-function
operations such as attaching and removing buckets, setting the machine up for backhoe operation, and lifting with
the backhoe. This manual cannot be all conclusive for every working situation and environment. If you have any
questions about the operation or controls of your machine contact your Dealer before attempting operation of the
machine.

INITIAL PROCEDURES AND RUN IN SERVICE STARTING THE ENGINE

Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hrs / page 5-13 NOTE: If the machine has not been run for several
Wheel Nuts and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . 10 hrs / page 6-6 weeks, or if the engine oil filter has been replaced,
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hrs / page 5-21 prime the turbocharger lines with oil. See page 4-4 in
Rear Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hrs / page 5-21 this Chapter for the instructions to fill the
turbocharger lines with oil.
4wd Front Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hrs / page 5-22
Service Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 6-3 1. Make sure the seat is in the LOADER position.
Park Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 6-3 2. Adjust the seat and fasten the seat belt.
Replace Hydraulic Filter . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 5-26 3. Make sure the parking brake is applied, the
Replace Transmission Filter . . . 100 hrs / page 5-21 direction control lever is in NEUTRAL and the
Replace Fuel Filters. . . . . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 5-28 engine hand throttle is pushed back to the IDLE
position.
ENGINE OPERATION 4. Turn the key switch to ON and check the engine
oil pressure and alternator warning lamps. Both
During the first 20 hours of operation, or if you rebuild
l a m p s m u s t i l l u m i n a t e. O n S M a n d S M +
the engine, make sure you do the following:
machines wait for the cluster to self-check and
1. Operate the machine with normal loads for the wake up. If the machine is equipped with an
first 8 hours. engine pre-heating system, wait until the lamp
2. Do not work the engine hard at stall speeds goes out before proceeding.
(wheels slowly turning or stopped and the engine 5. Push the foot throttle 1/4 down and turn the key
running at full throttle). switch to the START position to actuate the
3. Keep the engine at normal operating starter motor. Before the engine starts, check the
temperature. air cleaner and hydraulic fluid filter warning
lamps. Both lamps must illuminate.
4. Do not run the engine at idle speeds for long
periods of time. 6. If the engine starts and stops, do not actuate the
starter motor again until the starter motor stops
WARNING: Before starting engine, study turning.
operators manual safety messages. Read
all safety signs on machine. Clear the area NOTE: Do not operate the starter motor more than
of other persons. Learn and practice safe 30 seconds at one time. Let the starter motor cool for
use of controls before operation. It is your two minutes before you actuate the starter motor
responsibility to understand and follow again. While the starter motor is engaged, white or
manufacturers instructions on machine black smoke must be seen at the exhaust pipe. If no
operation, service, and to observe pertinent smoke is seen, check the fuel supply.
laws and regulation. Operators and repair 7. After the engine starts, check the instruments to
manuals can be obtained from your dealer. make sure the gauge indications are correct.
Figure 1 Run the engine at 1000 rpm until the coolant
temperature is warm.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-3

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

580M Priming Turbocharger Lines with Oil SM and SM+ Priming Turbocharger Lines with Oil
If the machine has not been run for several weeks, or If the machine has not been run for several weeks, or
if the engine oil filter has been replaced, prime the if the engine oil filter has been replaced, prime the
turbocharger lines with oil. turbocharger lines with oil.

1 1

BD05C027 Figure 2
1. INJECTION PUMP ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR BD08A525 Figure 3

1. Disconnect the electrical connector to the 1. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (ECU) CONNECTORS
injection pump solenoid. This will prevent the 1. Disconnect the two electrical connectors on the
engine from starting. Engine Control Unit (ECU).This will prevent the
2. Make sure all personnel are clear of the engine from starting.
machine. Signal your intentions by sounding the 2. Make sure all personnel are clear of the
horn. machine. Signal your intentions by sounding the
3. Turn the key switch to START and crank the horn.
starter for about 10 to 15 seconds. 3. Turn the key switch to START and crank the
4. Re-connect the wire to the injection pump starter for about 10 to 15 seconds.
solenoid. 4. Re-connect the two ECU connectors.
5. Start the engine and run at idle speed for two 5. Start the engine and run at idle speed for two
minutes. minutes.
6. Stop the engine and check for leaks. 6. Stop the engine and check for leaks.
7. After the engine oil has had the time to drain to 7. After the engine oil has had the time to drain to
the bottom of the pan for an accurate reading, the bottom of the pan for an accurate reading,
check the oil level with the dipstick. check the oil level with the dipstick.
8. Add oil, if necessary. 8. Add oil, if necessary.
9. Close the hood. 9. Close the hood.

4-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Engine Speed
Do not run the engine at idle speed for long periods.
This can cause a low operating temperature. Low
operating temperature can cause acids and deposits
in the engine oil. It is recommended that you run the
engine at full throttle when operating conditions
permit and when safe.
Parking the Machine and Stopping the Engine
1. Before you leave the machine, make sure the
machine is parked on a level surface. The
machine must be on level ground before you do
scheduled maintenance.
IMPORTANT: If you must temporarily park the
machine on a hillside, put the front of the machine
toward the bottom of the hill. Make sure the machine
is behind an object that will not move.
2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground.
3. Apply the parking brake and shift the direction
control lever to NEUTRAL.
4. Run the engine at idle speed for two minutes or
more if the engine has been working at full load.
This procedure will cool the engine parts evenly.
NOTE: Turning the engine OFF at higher than idle
RPM will damage the turbocharger.
5. Move the backhoe into the transport position or
lower the backhoe bucket to the ground. Move
the hand throttle to the IDLE position and stop
the engine. See page 27 for backhoe transport.
6. Turn the key switch to OFF to stop the engine.
Remove the key.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-5

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

OPERATING IN COLD WEATHER Cooling System:

Cold weather conditions cause special problems. Check the coolant mixture before you operate in cold
During these conditions, your machine will require temperatures. A mixture of 50% ethylene glycol and
special attention to prevent serious damage. Cold 50% water must be used in this machine.
weather maintenance will extend the service life of
This mixture will protect the engine cooling
your machine.
system down to -29° F (-34° C).
Battery and Electrical Components:
3. With the engine pre-heating system, turn the key
1. Clean the battery and make sure the battery(ies) switch to ON and check the instrument panel for
is at full charge. the engine pre-heat lamp. In cold temperature
NOTE: A fully charged battery at 0° F (-18° C) has the engine pre heat Indicator lamp will illuminate
only 40 percent of the normal starting power. Then, as the heater conditions indrawn air. Wait for the
when the temperature decreases to −20 ° F (-29° C), the indicator lamp to go OFF before turning the key
battery has only 18 percent of the power remaining. switch to the START position. Turn the key switch
to the START position until the engine starts,
I f y o u a d d w a t e r t o t h e b a t t e r y ( ie s ) a n d t h e then release the key.
temperature is below 32° F (0° C), make sure you
If the engine fails to start after two attempts allow
ch a r ge th e b a tte r y (ie s ) or r u n th e e n g in e fo r
the battery to recover for 4 to 5 minutes before
approximately two hours. This procedure will prevent
repeating the procedure.
battery freezing.
2. Inspect the battery cables and terminals. Clean WARNING: Do not use ether on these
and coat each terminal with a c orrosion machine. These machines are equipped with
prevention product. an engine pre heat system. Using ether may
Lubricants: cause a fire, explosion, Death or Serious
Injury.
1. Use the correct viscosity of oil in each
co mpo n en t a s d ete r min ed by th e amb ien t Figure 4
temperature.
In Cold Weather With The Engine Cold
As an example: SAE 30 engine oil at 32° F (0°
C) increases the star ting load by about 250 580M
percent. Make sure you follow the recommended When starting a cold engine at temperatures below 29
oil and filter service as shown in this manual. ° F (- 1° C) open the throttle fully. Turn the key switch
to the ON position and check the instrument cluster. If
2. Allow for longer warm up periods to bring the
the machine is equipped with an engine pre-heat
ma chin e an d co mpo n en ts u p to op e ratin g
system, wait for the cold start indicator light to go OFF
temperature.
before turning the key switch to the START position.
Fuel System: Turn the key switch to the START position until the
1. Check with your fuel supplier for the correct cold engine starts, then release the key.
weather fuel. Most regional distributors move the If the engine fails to start after a maximum of 30
correct supply in, as weather conditions require. seconds of cranking repeat the starting procedure. Do
Engine power will be reduced if wax particles are not operate the starting motor for more than 60
in the fuel filters. seconds.
2. Make sure to check for water in the fuel system. SM and SM+
Cold temperatures can cause water to collect in
the fuel tank. Check the water separator for water When starting at temperatures of 5 °F (-15°C) and
every 50 hours of operation. If no water is found, below the Engine Control Unit (ECU) will limit the
extend the interval. If water is found, check the maximum speed of the engine to 1200 rpm until the
fuel tank. engine is properly warmed.

In any condition, it is always best to keep the fuel NOTE: If the operator does not crank the engine
tank full, to help control water from collecting in within 30 seconds, after the engine pre-heat
the system. system lamp has gone out the process should be
started over. If the engine is not cranked within
30 seconds the cycle process is aborted.
Before you operate, move the machine slowly in
LOW gear. Then, stop the machine and actuate the
loader or backhoe controls for about ten minutes or
until all cylinders work correctly.

4-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

O n va r i a bl e p u m p S M + m a c h i n e s w h e n t h e BOOSTER BATTERY CONNECTION TO MACHINE

temperature is below 40 degrees F and the engine (JUMP STARTING THE MACHINE)
has been warmed up;
1. Leave the boom in the transport position with the WARNING: When the battery electrolyte is
transport pin installed. frozen, the battery can explode if, (1) you try
to charge the battery, or (2) you try to jump
2. Activate the pilot control switch.
start and run the engine. To prevent the
3. Raise the engine throttle between 1600 and battery electrolyte from freezing, try to keep
1800 rpm. the battery at full charge. If you do not follow
4. Place and hold the boom control in DOWN these instructions, you or others in the area
position. can be injured
Figure 5
5. While holding the boom control to the end of the
levers stroke cycle the backhoe bucket in and
WARNING: Batteries produce explosive
out.
gases. Keep sparks, flame, and cigarettes
NOTE: Watch the filter restriction indicator lamp. away. Ventilate when charging or using in an
If the oil is too cold the lamp will illuminate while enclosed space. Always shield eyes when
the operator cycles the functions. working near batteries.
6. Cycle the functions for approximately 30 Figure 6
seconds.
7. Release the controls and leave the machine
throttle set for approximately 15 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the filter restriction 1
indicator lamp remains OFF while cycling
functions.

NOTE: Immediately after the warm up procedure,

the machine may operate a bit slower than normal,
but will quickly warm to normal operating speeds.
OPERATING IN HOT WEATHER
BD03H061 Figure 7
To prevent damage to the machine, do the following:
1. PLACE THE POSITIVE JUMPER CABLE HERE
1. Keep the coolant at the correct level in the
coolant reservoir and in the radiator. Two persons are required for this procedure. Make
sure the person making the connection is wearing
2. See your Case dealer and have the Deaeration
face protection.
cap tested before hot weather starts. Replace
the cap as required. 1. Sit in the operators seat and have the other
person make the connections. Make sure the
3. Clean all dirt and debris from the radiator,
booster batteries are 12 volt.
coolers and engine area.
2. If using another machine for power, make sure
4. Check the condition of the fan drive belt.
the two machines do not touch.
5. Use lubricants of the correct viscosity.
3. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the
Use the correct solution of ethylene glycol and water positive (+) terminal as shown.
in the cooling system. 4. Connect the negative (−) jumper cable to the
frame, as far away as possible from the positive
(+) cable.
5. Start the engine and have the other person
disconnect the negative (−) jumper cable first and
the positive (+) jumper cable last.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-7

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Machine Operation B. Shift the transmission to second gear and

release the parking brake.
WARNING: Before each period of C. Shift the transmission direction control to
operation, check the machine for correct FORWARD and increase the engine speed to
operation of the steering, brakes, hydraulic full throttle.
controls, instruments, and safety equipment. D. When the machine is moving at full speed in
Check the NEUTRAL position of the second gear, push the brake pedals and stop
transmission control lever. A machine that the machine. The machine must stop
runs correctly can prevent accidents. Make smoothly and the brake pedal effort must feel
all necessary repairs or adjustments before firm.
you operate the machine.
SB040 Figure 8 See the repair manual for this machine or see your
dealer if you have problems with the machine.
Adjusting the Seat
Selecting Transmission Gears and Machine
Before starting each day: Direction
• adjust the position of the seat so that all controls The transmission is synchronized in all gears. You
may be moved through their entire range of motion may shift to any gear, without stopping the machine.
• fasten the seat belt Before you shift gears, push the clutch cutout button.
• in the loader operation position, confirm that you When you shift gears, always make sure the engine
are able to push the brake pedals all the way to the speed remains in the green area of the tachometer.
end of pedal action, while sitting with the seat belt
fastened
1
• in the backhoe operation position, confirm that you
are able to reach all backhoe controls, the throttle
control and move all necessary controls through
their entire range of motion 2
Before You Operate the Machine
When the engine is warm, decrease the engine
speed to idle and do the following:

1. Check the instrument panel.

BD00F141 Figure 9
2. Make sure the backhoe is in the TRANSPORT 1. MANUAL TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER
position and the stabilizers are raised. 2. CLUTCH CUTOUT BUTTON
3. Raise the loader about 600 mm (two feet) above
the ground and roll the bucket back against the
stops.
3
4. Test the parking brake in an open level area.
Make sure the area is clear of other persons.
A. Put the transmission control lever in third gear.
B. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission direction control to FORWARD.
C. Increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm. The
machine must not move.
NOTE: If the machine moves, contact your Dealer
immediately or see the Repair Manual for this
machine.
5. Release the parking brake and test the Service
brakes (foot brakes) in an open area on a hard BD07J087 Figure 10
level surface. Make sure the area is clear of other 3. LOADER CONTROL LEVER
persons.
A. Move the brake pedal lock to the right to hold
both pedals together.

4-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Machine Direction 3. Release the differential lock switch once traction

has been regained.
For forward travel, lift up the direction control lever
and push completely forward. NOTE: The differential lock will release automatically
when the load on the axle is removed.
To travel in reverse, lift up the direction control lever
and pull completely rearward. The center position is Before You Operate Through a Soft or Muddy
NEUTRAL. Area
The transmission direction control lever must be in NOTE: You can engage the differential lock when
the NEUTRAL position before you can start the the machine is moving straight.
engine. 1. If you move the machine through an area that is
NOTE: For Smooth operation before you change soft or muddy, make sure that the machine is
directions, reduce the engine speed. moving in a straight direction and that one of the
rear wheels is not rotating faster than the other
rear wheel.
2. Push down the differential lock switch. Keep this
1 switch pushed down while you move the machine
through the soft or muddy area.
3. After you have moved through the area, release
the differential lock switch.
IMPORTANT: You can cause damage to the rear
axle if you try to engage the differential lock when the
machine is turning or if one rear wheel is rotating
faster than the other rear wheel.
BD00F143 Figure 11 Working on a Hill
1. DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER Before you work the machine on a hill, always put the
Differential Lock transmission in a lower gear and test your brakes.
DO NOT let the machine move down the hill with the
transmission in NEUTRAL. DO NOT let the engine
speed increase greater than 2500 rpm. Use caution if
1 you must use the clutch cutout when you are digging
with the loader on a hill.

WARNING: Hillside operations can be

dangerous. Rain, mud, snow, ice, loose
gravel, soft ground, etc., change the ground
conditions. You must make a judgment if
your machine can be safely operated on any
hillside or ramp.
Figure 13

WARNING: Excessive speed can cause

BD07J087 Figure 12 loss of machine control. Do not coast down a
1. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH hill with a transmission in NEUTRAL or let
the engine speed increase to more than
The differential lock gives equal power to both rear 2500 RPM. Before operating or driving on a
wheels and is used in conditions where traction is hill, always shift to a lower gear. You or
poor. others around you can be injured.
If the Machine is Stuck Figure 14
1. Make sure the rear wheels are not turning.
WARNING: The parking brake will not hold
2. Push and hold down on the differential lock this machine from moving if one drive wheel
switch. is raised above the ground. Before raising
one drive wheel above the ground, always
block the front and rear of the other three
wheels. SA053

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-9

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

LOADER OPERATION
Clutch Cutout Switch
WARNING: When you lower a loaded
bucket, material can spill out if you do not
manually roll back the bucket. The
self-leveling feature does not roll back the
bucket automatically when the loader is
lowered. Other persons in the area can be
injured if material spills from the bucket
when the loader is lowered.
1
CM101 Figure 15
This information for loader operation does not include
all possible conditions. This is basic information that
you need to operate the machine.
If you are a new operator, always operate in a clear
area at decreased engine speed.
Safety When You Work
Be a careful operator. Do not allow yourself to BD05E509 Figure 17
become complacent. You can prevent accidents. 1. CLUTCH CUTOUT SWITCH - MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Fasten the safety belt before you start the engine. MACHINES

Push the clutch cutout switch to allow the engine to

increase speed and supply the loader with more
hydraulic oil for greater loader power and faster
1 control function. When you push the clutch cutout
switch, the transmission is disengaged from the drive
wheels. Release the clutch cutout switch to engage
the transmission power. The machine can roll free
when the clutch cutout switch is pushed. If required,
use the brake to stop the machine.

BD03H047 Figure 16
1. OPERATOR AND SEAT IN CORRECT POSITION FOR 2
LOADER OPERATION
Confirm that you can reach all controls and move
them through their entire range of motion with the
seat belt fastened.

BD07J087 Figure 18
2. CLUTCH CUTOUT SWITCH - POWERSHIFT
TRANSMISSION MACHINES

4-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

BUCKET LEVEL INDICATORS

Standard Bucket Level Indicator 3
The standard bucket level indicator has two pointers
on the bucket links. The bucket is level on the ground
when the two pointers are opposite each other. See
the following photograph.

1 1

BD05E508 Figure 19
1. STANDARD BUCKET LEVEL INDICATORS
4-In-1 Bucket Indicator

2
3

398658A1 Figure 21
BD05E506 Figure 20
2. 4-IN-1 BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR 4-IN-1 BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR DECAL
3. 4-IN-1 BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR DECAL Clam Depth Indicator for the 4-In-1 Bucket
The bucket position indicator is located on the bucket The clam indicator is located on the right side of the
links. This shows you the correct bucket angle when bucket. This indicator is used when the bucket is in
you use the bucket as a clam, loader, scraper, or the scraper position. The bucket opening or, depth of
dozer. Put the loader bucket 12 inches (304 mm) cut, is shown on this indicator. The 4-In-1 bucket can
above the ground and tilt the bucket to the desired make a cut up to 102 mm (four inches) in depth.
position.

BD05E507 Figure 22
4. CLAM DEPTH INDICATOR

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-11

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4-IN-1 BUCKET OPERATION

AS172 Figure 23 AS173 Figure 25

SCRAPER DOZER
Tilt the bucket to the scraper position on the indicator Put the bucket in the position shown and open the
and open the clam to the desired depth of cut. clam completely.

AS174 Figure 26
AS171 Figure 24
CLAMSHELL
STANDARD BUCKET
Put the bucket over the material to be moved. Close
Close the clam and the bucket is a standard bucket. the clam on the material to be moved.

4-12 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Return-To-Dig
After you dump the load, use the return-to-dig to put the bucket in position for another dig cycle.
The return-to-dig uses both the FLOAT and the ROLLBACK positions. To operate, put the lift arm control in the
ROLLBACK position and the FLOAT position. The bucket will roll backward until the bottom of the bucket is level.
Then, the bucket will stop automatically.
The loader arms will continue to lower until (1) the bucket reaches the ground or (2) you manually pull the lift arm
control back to HOLD (NEUTRAL). See page 6-3 to adjust the return-to-dig.

BD07J088 Figure 27
1. MOVE THE CONTROL LEVER TO THE ROLLBACK AND
FLOAT POSITIONS FOR RETURN-TO-DIG

1 2

B9410267 Figure 28
1. BUCKET IN FLOAT POSITION 2. BUCKET IN ROLLBACK POSITION

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-13

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Job Layout
Set up the work cycle as short as possible. Truck positioning is very important for efficient cycles.
Spend a few minutes leveling off the work area, if necessary. Smooth runways for the machine and a level parking
area for trucks will speed up the job.

WARNING: Quick response steering may adversely affect machine stability under some operating
conditions. DO NOT use this feature until you are completely accustomed to faster response steering.
Figure 29
COMFORT STEER SYSTEM

BD00F026 Figure 33
1. COMFORT STEER SWITCH
If conditions allow, the operator may choose the
Comfort Steer Option, in cyclic work.
The Comfort Steer System gives the operator faster
B9402464J Figure 30 steering with less turn of the machines steering
wheel.

WARNING: When you operate the machine, NOTE: Wheel movement, lock to lock, with the
keep the loader bucket as low as possible. Comfort Steering System disengaged requires
This low position gives better balance and three full turns of the steering wheel. With the
permits you to see more clearly. If the bucket Comfort Steering System engaged, the same lock to
is full and you move the machine over lock wheel movement requires slightly less than
ground that is rough or surfaces that can one and a half turns of the steering wheel.
cause the machine to slide, always operate
When any one of the following requirements are met
at slow speed. If you do not use this
the Comfort Steer option will disengage.
procedure, the machine can go out of control
and roll-over. • Comfort Steer will disengage and return to normal
SA041 Figure 31
steer if the operator pushes the left portion of the
switch.
WARNING: Operating a loader with a full • Comfort Steer will disengage and default to
bucket on a hillside can cause the machine normal steer when the key switch is turned to OFF,
to roll over. If possible, avoid turning the or the machine loses electrical power.
machine and always move forward up the
• Comfort Steer will disengage when the operator
hill and back down. Always keep the load
selects 3rd or 4th gear on the transmission. If the
low. If you do not follow these instructions,
system is disengaged this way, the operator must
you can be injured or killed.
select a lower gear and press the switch to
Figure 32 re-activate.

4-14 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

LIFTING WITH THE LOADER

If you lift a load with the loader, be very careful. This machine is NOT a crane.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that you use rigging equipment that has the capacity to lift the loads that you will be
moving. Always check the rigging equipment each day for damaged or missing parts. Be sure no other persons are
under the load as you move it.

BP95H017 Figure 34
1. LIFTING POINTS

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-15

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

LOADER HYDRAULIC COUPLER

If equipped, the loader hydraulic coupler allows the operator to change front end attachments without the use of
special tools or additional manpower.

BK97K197 Figure 35 BK97K195 Figure 38

4. LOADER HYDRAULIC COUPLER LOCK PINS SHOWN
Installing A Bucket
RETRACTED
1. Tilt the loader hydraulic coupler forward and 4. Lift the loader arms and rotate the coupler rearward
engage the top coupler pins in the attachment until the coupler lock pins are aligned with the
upper mounting hooks. attachment lower mounting bores. Release the
coupler switch and press on the right side of the
2 coupler switch to allow the coupler pins to engage
in the attachment mounting bores.

1
5

BK97K199 Figure 36
1. TOP COUPLER PIN
2. ATTACHMENT UPPER MOUNTING HOOK
2. Press and hold the left side of the loader quick BK97K194 Figure 39
coupler switch. See the following photo. 5. HYDRAULIC COUPLER LOCK PIN IN ENGAGED POSITION
5. Visually confirm the lock pins have secured the
attachment.
Removing An Attachment
1. With the attachment resting on the ground, press
and hold the left side of the loader quick coupler
switch to retract the coupler lock pins.
2. Raise the attachment a maximum of 1 to 2
inches (25.4 to 50.8 mm) off the ground and
slowly rotate the top of the attachment outward
until the lock pins are clear of the attachment
3 mounting bores. Release the loader hydraulic
coupler switch.
3. Carefully lower the attachment to the ground
BD08A303 Figure 37 while rotating the top of the coupler outward.
3. LOADER QUICK COUPLER SWITCH
4. When the upper coupler mounting pins are free
3. This will retract the coupler lock pins. back away from the attachment.

4-16 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

BACKHOE OPERATION

SAFETY WHEN YOU WORK

Be a careful operator; you can prevent accidents. Read the following information.

WARNING: Always know the location of all workers in your area. Warn them before you start working the
machine. Always keep all other persons away from your area. Serious injury or death can result if you do
not follow these instructions.
SA015 Figure 40

WARNING: Uncontrolled machine movement can injure. Before you turn the operators seat around to the
BACKHOE operating position, shift the direction control lever and transmission control to NEUTRAL and
apply the parking brake.
SA050 Figure 41
IMPORTANT: Be careful when you swing the
backhoe completely to the side. In some positions,
1 the backhoe can contact the stabilizers and can
cause damage.

BD03H048 Figure 42
1. OPERATOR IN CORRECT POSITION TO OPERATE
BACKHOE

General
The backhoe will dig more material in less time when
a smooth, short dig cycle is used. Keep each dig
cycle smooth.
When you force the bucket to dig a load that is too
large, you will cause a, hydraulic stall, (dipper control
lever pulled back and the bucket is not moving). The
main relief valve of the hydraulic system will make a
noise when, hydraulic stall, occurs. Hydraulic stall,
will cause: (1) cycle times to be longer, (2) the
temperature of the hydraulic oil to increase, and (3)
increases fuel consumption.
Stabilizer Pads
If you dig next to a building, wall etc., change the
position of the stabilizer pads. See the photographs
on the following page. Do the following steps:
1. Remove a retaining ring from the pin on each
stabilizer pad.
2. Use a hammer and drift. Remove each pin.
3. Put the stabilizer pads in the position shown.
Install the pins and retaining rings.
IMPORTANT: Always position the stabilizer pads for
maximum stability when you are not operating the
backhoe next to a wall, building, etc.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-17

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

STABILIZER PADS
STANDARD TWO POSITION STABILIZER PADS
NOTE: Stabilizers are shown at left rear of machine.

BD00G092 Figure 43 BD00G092 Figure 44

WORKING NEXT TO BUILDINGS POSITION FOR MAXIMUM REAR STABILITY AND MINIMUM
WIDTH FOR TRAVELING
CEMETERY STABILIZER PADS WITH RUBBER PADS

BD03F030 Figure 45 BD03F031 Figure 46

RUBBER PAD DOWN DIRT PAD DOWN

COMBINATION FLIP-OVER STABILIZER PADS

BD00G089 Figure 47 BD00G089 Figure 48

RUBBER PADS DOWN DIRT PADS DOWN
Figure 49

4-18 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

BEFORE YOU DIG WITH THE BACKHOE

BD03H042 Figure 50
1. Use hand rails and steps when getting onto the BD07J098 Figure 53
machine.
4. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Push the
P symbol on the switch.

BD00F143 Figure 51 BD00G095 Figure 54

2. Make sure the direction control is in NEUTRAL. 5. Remove the swing lock pin from the transport
position and place it in the storage position
shown, located to the operator’s right, sitting in
the backhoe position.
WARNING: Windows must be placed in the desired
position and secured before proceeding.
6. On pilot control machines, adjust the windows
before actuating the backhoe hydraulics.

BD00F141 Figure 52
3. Make sure the transmission control is in
NEUTRAL.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-19

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

BP98J041 Figure 58

BD03H066 Figure 55 NOTE: If required, bottom of bucket can be

7. On pilot control machines, adjust the control positioned flat on the ground.
towers forward or rearward. 12. Increase the engine speed.

BD03H052 Figure 56
8. On pilot control machines, adjust the upper
towers left to right.

BD00F022 Figure 59
1. HAND THROTTLE - 580M

BD03H048 Figure 57
9. Make sure all controls are easily reached, the
seat is locked into position and the seat belt is
secure.
10. Start the engine.
NOTE: If the machine is equipped with ride control.
Make sure the ride control switch is in the OFF
position. BD08A300
Figure 60
11. Dump the loader and lower the bucket to the 2. ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE SUPER M AND SUPER M
ground. Raise the front wheels above the + MACHINES
ground.

4-20 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING: Put the stabilizers in the

OPERATING position before you lower the
boom and extend the dipper. The front of the
machine can raise above the ground and
cause an accident if the stabilizers are not
down in the OPERATING position.
000000 Figure 61
1
WARNING: Before you raise the stabilizers
from the OPERATING position do one of the
following, (1) put the backhoe in the
TRANSPORT position, (2) completely retract BD00G098 Figure 64
the dipper and raise the boom, or (3) make 1. BOOM CONTROL LEVER
sure the tires are touching the ground and put
the backhoe bucket on the ground. The
machine can become unstable and cause an
accident if the stabilizers are raised and the
tires and backhoe bucket are not touching the
ground.
Figure 62
13. Lower the stabilizers. Use the stabilizers to raise
the level of the machine until the rear tires are 2
above the ground.

BD03K046 Figure 65
2. BOOM LATCH RELEASE

BD00G094 Figure 63 1
14. Move the backhoe out of the TRANSPORT
position.
A. Push the boom control lever (1) forward. At the
same time step down on the boom latch BD00G100 Figure 66
release lever (2) toward you. B. Pull the boom control lever (1) to the rear to
move the boom forward (over center).

Before each period of operation, check the backhoe for correct function of each control. A backhoe that
operates correctly can prevent accidents. Make all necessary repairs or adjustments before you operate the
backhoe.
SA017 Figure 67

Do not dig the ground under the backhoe stabilizers. The machine can fall into the excavation if the bank
falls in.
SA063 Figure 68

WARNING: When you operate the backhoe on the side of a hill, (1) make the machine level with the
stabilizers and (2) put the earth from the trench on the highest side of the trench. Failure to follow these
instructions can cause injury.
SA064 Figure 69

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-21

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

INCREASED ROTATION BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER

2
3

1
BD00G109 Figure 70
1. BUCKET HOLE #1
2. BUCKET HOLE #2 (CANNOT BE USED WITH CASE
BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER)
3. COUPLER POSITION #1
4. COUPLER POSITION #2

Bucket hole #2 on Case Universal backhoe buckets

CANNOT be used with the Case backhoe bucket
coupler.
NOTE: Attempting to attach a Case bucket in the #2
bucket hole may damage the coupler by bending or
breaking the hook.
Coupler position #1 should be used as a “Power
Hole” but it has less total rotation than coupler
position #2. Coupler position #2 has the most speed,
roll out, and roll in, but has less bucket digging force
than coupler position #1. Coupler position #2 is the
most versatile and productive in all but the hardest
digging.
Coupler Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .#1#2
Standard Dipper
Max. Roll Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8° 37°
Max. Roll In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156° 161°
Total Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164° 198°
Extendahoe
Max. Roll Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8° 29°
Max. Roll In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156° 161°
Total Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164° 190°

4-22 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Extendahoe Lock Pin

Before you work the Extendahoe, put the backhoe in
the position shown and remove the Extendahoe lock
pin. Put the pin in the storage hole during operation.

BD00F118 Figure 71
Then, before transport, lock the extendable dipper in
the retracted position with the lock pin.

BD00F117 Figure 72

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-23

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Backhoe Danger Area

WARNING: Before you operate the backhoe in an area where your visibility is reduced, such as next to a
building, etc., always install a guard rail and warning signs to keep other persons away from your machine.
SA062 Figure 73

WARNING: A working backhoe can injure or kill. Before you start, always make sure that all persons are
away from the DANGER AREA.
SA061 Figure 74

B890879J Figure 75
DIGGING WITH THE BACKHOE

WARNING: A working backhoe can injure or kill. Before you start, always make sure that all persons are
away from the DANGER AREA.
SA061 Figure 76

4-24 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Filling the Bucket

Fill the bucket by moving the dipper in. Keep the bottom of the bucket parallel with the cut. Let the bucket teeth and
cutting edge cut through the ground like a knife blade. The type of material that you dig determines the depth of the
cut.

B8400068 Figure 77
1. CORRECT
2. WRONG
3. CORRECT TRENCHING METHOD

IMPORTANT: Do not back fill a trench with the backhoe by swinging the bucket against the soil.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-25

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Moving the Machine Forward When You Are Digging on Level Ground
You can use the backhoe to move the machine forward as you trench.

BD00H003 Figure 78
1. Make sure the front wheels of the machine are
STRAIGHT forward.
2. Decrease the engine speed to 1200 rpm. Make
sure the parking brake is released and the
transmission controls are in NEUTRAL.
3. Raise the boom and retract the dipper. Move the
boom as required to put the bucket teeth on
ground that is firm. Lower the backhoe bucket to
the ground.
4. Raise the stabilizers and loader bucket about
300 mm (one foot) above the ground.
5. Use the boom and dipper to move the machine.
Slowly move the dipper out. At the same time,
lower the boom.
6. At the new position, lower the stabilizers and
loader bucket to the ground and level the
machine.
7. Apply the parking brake.

4-26 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Moving the Machine Forward When You are Digging on a Hill

WARNING: Be careful when you dig on the side of a hill. When you move the machine forward, the
machine can go out of control and turn over. You must be in the seat (seat in the loader position) when you
drive the machine forward. Always engage the parking brake and shift the transmission and direction
control to NEUTRAL before you operate the backhoe.
SA065 Figure 79

PUTTING THE BACKHOE IN THE TRANSPORT POSITION

Put the backhoe in transport before you use the loader or before you move the machine on a road or highway.
1. Make sure the direction control lever and
transmission control are in NEUTRAL.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Use the swing controls and put the backhoe
bucket straight behind the machine.
4. If your machine has an extendable dipper, retract
the dipper and install the extendahoe lock pin.
5. Make sure the stabilizers are down and the rear
wheels are above the ground.
6. Use the hand throttle and run the engine at about
approximately 1200 rpm.
BD00G102 Figure 81
7. Retract the dipper and curl in the bucket.
NOTE: The boom lock will automatically engage.
8. During this next procedure, the backhoe boom The boom, dipper and bucket are now in the
will be moving toward you past the ver tical TRANSPORT position.
position.
9. Raise the stabilizers completely. Decrease the
A. Pull the boom control lever rearward. engine speed to idle.
10. Turn the operator’s seat to the loader operating
position.
11. Stop the engine.
12. Install the swing lock pin.

BD00G101 Figure 80
B. When the boom reaches the vertical position,
rapidly push the boom control lever forward.
The boom will continue to move toward you
until the boom stop is reached.

BD03K061 Figure 82

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-27

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CASE BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER

WARNING: Machine movement without an operator can cause injury or death. If you must service this
machine with the engine running, have another person help you and follow the instructions in the operators
manual or repair manual. Do not leave the machine when the engine is running.
SA066 Figure 83
NOTE: The machine shown in the following IMPORTANT: Do not use the boom to move the
procedure may be different from your machine. The machine unless a bucket is attached. Damage to the
procedure is the same. coupler may occur.
1. Make sure the bucket or attachment has a Case
Coupler pin installed.
2. Park the machine on a level surface, lower the
stabilizers to the ground and level the machine.
Make sure all persons are away from the
machine.
3. Rotate the bucket out as shown leaving the
bucket off the ground.

BP00H162 Figure 87
IMPORTANT: Attempting to attach a Case bucket in
the #2 bucket hole may damage the coupler by
bending or breaking the hook. See page 22.
8. With the bucket suspended off the ground retract
the bucket cylinder until the bucket starts to
rotate out as shown below. Install the bucket pin.

BP00H160 Figure 84
4. Remove the snap ring and the bucket pin.

BP00H161 Figure 88
9. Install the snap ring.

BP00H161 Figure 85
5. Rotate the bucket out and lower to the ground.

BP00H162 Figure 86
6. Rotate the coupler out of the bucket.
7. Pick up the next bucket and raise the boom.

4-28 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CASE BACKHOE BUCKET QUICK COUPLER

WARNING: Machine movement without an operator can cause injury or death. If you must service this
machine with the engine running, have another person help you and follow the instructions in the operators
manual or repair manual. Do not leave the machine when the engine is running.
SA066 Figure 89
NOTE: The machine shown in the following
procedure may be different from your machine. The
procedure is the same.
1. Make sure the bucket or attachment has a
Hydraulic Case Coupler pin installed.
2. Park the machine on a level surface, lower the
stabilizers to the ground and level the machine.
Make sure all persons are away from the
machine.
3. Rotate the bucket out as shown put the bucket on 2
the ground.
BD00H134 Figure 92
2. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER PIN RETRACTED
5. Hold down the top of the backhoe quick coupler
rocker switches and extend the bucket cylinder to
rotate the backhoe bucket quick coupler out of
the bucket as shown.

BD00H133 Figure 90
NOTE: It is necessary to push both rocker switches
at the same time to activate the Backhoe Quick
Coupler.
4. Push the top of the backhoe quick coupler rocker BD00H137 Figure 93
switches to disengage/retract the backhoe quick
coupler pins.

BC00G015

1 1

BD03H033 Figure 91
1. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER ROCKER SWITCHES

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-29

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Bucket Installation
IMPORTANT: Do not use the boom to move the
machine unless a bucket is attached. Damage to the
coupler may occur.

BD00G117 Figure 97

BD00H136 Figure 94
1. Move the backhoe into position to pick up the
bucket as shown.

2 2

BD03H033 Figure 98
2. BOTTOM PORTION OF THE BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER
ROCKER SWITCHES

5. Push the bottom rocker switches to

engage/extend the backhoe quick coupler pins.
BD00H135 Figure 95
2. Retract the bucket cylinder to engage the bucket
into the quick coupler as shown.

1 3
1

BD00G116 Figure 99
3. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER PIN EXTENDED

NOTE: Visually check to make sure the quick

BD08A300 Figure 96 coupler pins are fully extended into the bucket ears
1. TOP PORTION OF THE BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER before operating the backhoe.
ROCKER SWITCHES
3. Push the top of the backhoe quick coupler rocker
switches to disengage/retract the backhoe quick
coupler pins.
4. Hold down the top of the quick coupler rocker
switches and lift the bucket to allow the bucket to
rotate into the locking position.
4-30 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA
 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Lifting with the Backhoe

The backhoe is NOT a crane. For this reason, always
be very careful when you lift a load with the backhoe.
Use the backhoe lifting charts in the specifications
section of this manual and read the instructions
below before you lift a load with the backhoe.
1 1. Know and understand each signal from the
signalman before you start.
2. Always know the location of all persons in your
working area.

WARNING: Do not use the hook end of the

coupler when lifting loads. The sling can
BD00G109 Figure 100
come out of the coupler and the load can fall,
1. LIFT EYE injuring others in the area.
1. Install a clevis hook in the lift eye. SA079 Figure 103
3. Lower both stabilizers and raise the machine so
that both rear tires are about 25 to 50 mm (one to
two inches) above the ground. Make sure the
machine is level.
NOTE: If the ground is soft, put a wide pad (wood
boards) under each stabilizer pad.
2 4. Dump and lower the loader bucket to the ground.
5. Connect a hand line to the load before you start.
Make sure the person holding the hand line is
away from the load.
6. Test the lift capacity before you start your job:
BD00G108 Figure 101
A. Put the machine close to the load.
2. CLEVIS HOOK
B. Use a cable or sling to fasten the load to the
2. Attach safety approved sling, cable or chain to
end of the dipper at the lift eye.
the clevis hook.
C. Lift the load with the backhoe so the load is 25
IMPORTANT: Make sure that you use rigging to 50 mm (one or two inches) above the
equipment that has the capacity to lift the loads that ground.
you will be moving. Always check the rigging
equipment each day for damaged or missing parts. D. Swing the load all the way to one side.
Be sure no other persons are under the load as you E. Move the load away from the machine. Make
move it. sure you keep the load 25 to 50 mm (one to
two inches) above the ground.
F. Lower the load to the ground if (1) one of the
stabilizers is raised above the ground or (2)
3 there is any indication that the stability of the
machine is reduced.
7. Always move the load slowly. Do not move the
load over the top of persons. Keep all persons
away from the load. Do not exceed the lift
c a p a c i t y fo r t h i s m a c h i n e s h o w n i n t h e
specifications section.
BP95H015 Figure 102 8. When the load is raised, keep all persons away
3. HOOK END OF COUPLER until the load is placed on blocks or is placed on
the ground.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-31

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

BACKHOE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

With the engine stopped, connect the hydraulic lines
for the attachment to the fittings located on the WARNING: Reverse connection could
dipper. cause hazardous and unintended operation
of, or damage to the attachment. Follow the
NOTE: Always read the manufacturers attachment attachment manufacturers instructions to
instructions for proper setup. avoid injury.
M481 Figure 107
Pilot Control Auxiliary Hydraulic Switches
1 2 Buttons on the left joystick will provide control of the
auxiliary attachments. Bi-directional buttons are
shown (1).

BD05C030 Figure 104

1. PRESSURE SIDE OF CIRCUIT
2. RETURN SIDE OF CIRCUIT
The right side fitting is the PRESSURE connection
and the left side fitting the return fitting.
BD03H012 Figure 108
Mechanical Auxiliary Hydraulic Controls

BD05C041 Figure 105

1. HAND CONTROL LEVER FOR BI-DIRECTIONAL
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

BD00G086 Figure 106

2. FOOT CONTROL SWITCH FOR UNI-DIRECTIONAL
AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

4-32 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

MOVING A DISABLED MACHINE 5. Remove the two bolts that secure the solenoid
block.
WARNING: Personal injury or death can
result when you tow a disabled machine
incorrectly. Read the following 3
recommendations. If you do not understand 4
the procedures contact your Dealer. Death
or serious injury may result if these
instructions are not followed.
CM100 Figure 109
IMPORTANT: Towing the Loader Backhoe is not
recommended.
If the machine must be towed the SAHR (spring
applied hydraulically released) brakes must be
released.
To release the SAHR brake:
1. Chock the wheels to prevent movement.
2. Remove the mat and floor plate.
BS08A223 Figure 112
3. PARK BRAKE SOLENOID BLOCK SHOWN ROTATED 90
DEGREES
4. GREASE FITTING
6. Carefully lift up and rotate the park brake release
block 90 degrees and retighten the bolts. Torque
1 to 20 Nm (14 pound feet).
7. Attach the grease supply to the fitting and pump
approximately 65 pumps.
IMPORTANT: Extreme pressure is NOT needed
to release the brake. Over pressurization may
damage the seals. Moderate effort is required on
the grease gun.
8. Carefully remove the wheel chocks, as the
BD08A301 Figure 110
machine may now be moved.
1. PARK BRAKE SOLENOID BLOCK AS SEEN LOOKING
DOWN THROUGH FLOOR PLATE OPENING IMPORTANT: The machine should be free to roll.
3. Locate the park brake release solenoid block on If the machine does not roll, there may be an
the transmission. issue in the parking brake or drivetrain. Contact
your Dealer.
4. Clean the area of dirt and debris.
To re-activate the park brake:
IMPORTANT: After grease has been used to release
the parking brake it will be necessary to clean and
2 flush the entire system before placing the machine
back into operation. Contact your Dealer for this
procedure.
2
NOTE: Grease trapped in the brake will come out
under the block.
1. Slowly loosen the two bolts that hold the solenoid
block in position.
2. Confirm that the 3 o-rings are in the correct
p os ition a nd th at all su r fac es ar e f re e o f
contamination.
BD08A302 Figure 111 3. Return the solenoid block to its original position,
2. PARK BRAKE SOLENOID BLOCK RETAINING BOLTS
replace the bolts, and torque to 20 Nm (14 pound
feet).

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-33

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

TOWING THE MACHINE 11. Tow the disabled machine at a maximum speed
If your machine is disabled, you must make a of 1/2 m.p.h. (2.4 km/h). Do not exceed this
judgement if the machine can be moved without speed.
damage. If possible, repair the machine at the job ENGINE STOPPED (2WD AND 4WD)
site.
1. Engage the parking brake.
The towing machine must have power, steering and
braking ability to stop both machines. The speed at 2. Block the wheels with wheel chocks.
which the disabled machine is moved, must not 3. Place the transmission in neutral.
exceed 1/2 mile per hour (2.4 km/h).
4. Place the direction control lever in neutral.
The machines must be attached as closely as
possible. 5. Place the 4wd switch in neutral, if equipped.

The disabled machine must be moved only far 6. Raise all tools and attachments off the ground.
enough to reach a safe repair location or onto a 7. Attach a rigid drawbar to the machine. Make sure
trailer. the towing machine has enough power and
braking ability to move and stop both machines.
Before moving a disabled machine you must be able
to answer these questions: 8. Disconnect the rear driveshaft on 2wd machines
and both front and rear driveshafts on 4wd
• Does the towing machine have braking and models.
steering capacity for both machines?
9. Remove wheel chocks.
• Does the towing hardware, chains, cables, have
the proper capacity to move the machine safely? 10. Release the parking brake.
• Will the disabled machine have steering and 11. No riders - keep all other persons completely out
braking capability? of the area.
• Will moving the machine cause damage to IMPORTANT: Tow the disabled machine at a
drivetrain or moving parts that lack lubrication? maximum speed of 1/2 m.p.h. (2.4 km/h). Do not
Additional considerations: exceed this speed.

• Be certain that all personnel involved are shielded

in the event that towing apparatus might break.
• An operator may only be allowed on the towed
vehicle if it has steering and braking capability.
• Always block the disabled machines wheels
before releasing the brakes or drivetrain
component.
IMPORTANT: The loader/backhoe engine may not
be started by towing the machine. The drivetrain
components will be damaged!
ENGINE RUNNING (2WD AND 4WD)
1. Engage the parking brake.
2. Block the wheels with wheel chocks.
3. Place the transmission in neutral.
4. Place the direction control lever in neutral.
5. Place the 4wd switch in neutral, if equipped.
6. Raise all tools and attachments off the ground.
7. Attach a rigid drawbar to the machine. Make sure
the towing machine has enough power and
braking ability to move and stop both machines.
8. Remove wheel chocks.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. No riders - keep all other persons completely out
of the area.

4-34 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ON A TRAILER

WARNING: The machine can slip and fall

from a trailer or ramp and cause injury or
death. Make sure the trailer and ramp are not
slippery. Remove all oil, grease, ice, etc.
Carefully move the machine off or onto the
trailer with the machine centered on the
trailer and ramp.
Figure 113 2

BD03F024 Figure 115

2. TIE DOWN LOCATION - SIDE CHASSIS BOTH SIDES
10. Measure the distance from the ground to the
highest point of the machine. You must know the
1 1 clearance height of the machine.

BP98J031 Figure 114

1. WHEEL BLOCKS

NOTE: The machine shown in the following

procedure may be different from your machine. The
procedure is the same.
3
You must know the rules or laws for safety that are
used in each area that you will be in. Make sure that BD00J043 Figure 116
your truck and trailer are equipped with the correct 3. TIE DOWN LOCATION - BACKHOE BOTH SIDES
safety equipment. Park on a level surface. 11. After you have driven a few miles, stop the truck
1. Put a block at the front and rear of the trailer and check your load. Make sure the chains are
wheels. still tight and that the machine has not moved on
2. Put the backhoe in TRANSPORT, fasten your the trailer.
seat belt, shift the transmission to 1st gear, and UNLOADING A MACHINE FROM A TRAILER
slowly drive the machine onto the trailer.
1. Remove the chains and blocks from the machine.
3. Lower the loader bucket onto the trailer, shift the
2. Put the backhoe in the TRANSPORT position or
direction control lever to NEUTRAL and apply the
raise the rear attachment.
parking brake.
3. Fasten your seat belt.
4. Lower the backhoe bucket or rear attachment to
the floor of the trailer if possible. 4. Shift the transmission to 1st gear, release the
parking brake and drive slowly off the trailer.
5. Stop the engine and remove the key.
6. Shift the transmission control to NEUTRAL.
7. Put a block at the front and rear of each tire.
8. Make sure all cab windows are closed and
latched.
NOTE: If windows are open or in the partial open
latch position, wind pressure can break the latch or
the glass.
9. Use chains and binders to fasten the machine to
the trailer.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 4-35

 CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

NOTES

4-36 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

Chapter 5
LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUPPORT STRUT FOR LOADER LIFT ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
CASE FAMILY LUBRICATION AND SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
AS REQUIRED SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
INITIAL 10 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
INITIAL 20 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
EVERY 50 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
INITIAL 100 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
EVERY 100 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
EVERY 250 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
EVERY 500 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
EVERY 1000 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
EVERY 2000 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 5-1

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

5-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

LUBRICATION, FILTERS AND FLUIDS

GENERAL SAFETY BEFORE YOU SERVICE

WARNING: Improper service or repair can cause injury or death. If you do not understand the service
procedures for this machine, see your Case dealer or the repair manual for this machine.
SA021 Figure 1

WARNING: Before attempting any service procedures on the machine it is your responsibility to know how
many accumulators are on the machine and how to properly release pressure of each. Not releasing
pressure properly can cause death or serious injury.
M959 Figure 2
The following two chapters cover servicing the machine with recommended lubricants, and coolants, under normal
working conditions. To insure long service and efficient operation follow the service intervals listed. Extreme
working and environmental conditions require that service intervals be shortened.
This chapter is organized by service hour intervals. Beginning with items that may be As Required service and then
continuing from 10 hours or Daily to 2000 hours. Initial service checks for new machines or rebuilt components are
also included.
Use Case fluids, lubricants and filters for the best protection and performance of your machine. All fluids, lubricants
and filters must be disposed of in compliance with environmental standards and regulations.
Contact your Dealer with any questions regarding the service and maintenance of this machine.
Read the safety decals and information decals on the machine. Read the operator’s manual and safety manual.
Understand the operation of the machine before you start servicing.

BD05C034 / 321-4614 Figure 3

Before you service the machine, put a Do Not Operate tag on the steering wheel or over the key switch. Place the
tag at a location everyone who might operate or service the machine may see clearly. One Do Not Operate tag, is
included with your new machine. Additional tags, part number 321-4614, are available from your Case Dealer.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-3

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

ENGINE HOURMETER
Service your machine at the intervals given in the Lubrication/Maintenance Charts. When you service your
machine, use only high quality Case Akcela lubricants.
The engine hourmeter shows the amount of actual hours the engine has run. Use the engine hourmeter along with
the Lubrication/Maintenance Charts to service your machine at the correct time periods.

1
2

BD05C049 Figure 4
1. ENGINE HOURMETER - 580M SERIES 3 MACHINES
2. ENGINE HOURMETER - SUPER M AND M + SERIES 3 MACHINES

5-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

SUPPORT STRUT FOR LOADER LIFT ARMS

WARNING: If you service the machine with the loader lift arms raised, always use the support strut.
1. Empty the loader bucket, raise the loader lift arms to maximum height and stop the engine.
2. Remove the rear pin from the support strut and lower the support strut onto the cylinder rod.
3. Install the rear pin in the support strut.
4. Slowly lower the lift arms onto the support strut.
If you do not follow this procedure, you can cause serious injury or death if the loader lift arms are lowered
by accident.
SA068 Figure 5

Supporting Loader Lift Arms Lowering Loader Lift Arms

BD03H038 Figure 6 BD03H040 Figure 9

1. Raise the loader lift arms to maximum height and 1. Raise the loader lift arms. Stop the engine.
stop the engine. Remove the pin from the support strut.

BD03H067 Figure 7 BD03H039 Figure 10

2. Remove the rear pin, and lower the support strut 2. Raise the support strut up to the STORAGE
onto the cylinder rod. Install the rear pin. position and install the pin.

BD03H040 Figure 8 BD03H038 Figure 11

3. Slowly lower the lift arms onto the support strut. 3. Start the engine and lower the loader to the
ground.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-5

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

ENGINE CRANKCASE
All M Series 3 - Tier 3 machines
Capacity w/ filter...........................................................................................................................14.4 qts. (13.6 L)
Specification ............................................................................................... Case Akcela No. 1 15W-40 API CI-4
FUEL TANK
580M
Capacity .........................................................................................................................................31.4 gal (119 L)
Optional tank .................................................................................................................................40.0 gal (151 L)
Specification ..................................................................................................................................... No. 2 diesel
580 Super M, 580 Super M +, 590 Super M and 590 Super M +
Capacity .........................................................................................................................................42.0 gal (159 L)
Specification ..................................................................................................................................... No. 2 diesel
COOLING SYSTEM
580 M
Capacity with heater .................................................................................................................... 17.8 qts (16.8 L)
Capacity without heater ................................................................................................................17.0 qts (16.1 L)
Specification ............................................................................................... 50% water and 50% ethylene glycol

580 Super M, 580 Super M +, 590 Super M and 590 Super M +

Capacity with heater .................................................................................................................... 19.0 qts (18.0 L)
Capacity without heater ................................................................................................................18.3 qts (17.3 L)
Specification ............................................................................................... 50% water and 50% ethylene glycol
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
580 M
Total system ................................................................................................................................25.95 gal (98.2 L)
Total w/Extendahoe ..................................................................................................................27.45 gal (103.9 L)
Reservoir w/filter .........................................................................................................................12.45 gal (47.1 L)
Reservoir w/o filter ......................................................................................................................11.95 gal (45.2 L)
Specification ............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra
580 Super M and 580 Super M +
Total system ..............................................................................................................................29.45 gal (111.5 L)
Total w/Extendahoe ...................................................................................................................30.95 gal (117.2 L)
Reservoir w/filter .........................................................................................................................12.45 gal (47.1 L)
Reservoir w/o filter ......................................................................................................................11.95 gal (45.2 L)
Specification ............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra
590 Super M and 590 Super M +
Total system ..............................................................................................................................32.20 gal (122.0 L)
Total w/Extendahoe .....................................................................................................................33.7 gal (127.6 L)
Reservoir w/filter .........................................................................................................................12.45 gal (47.1 L)
Reservoir w/o filter ......................................................................................................................11.95 gal (45.2 L)
Specification ............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra

5-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

TRANSMISSION
2 Wheel Drive
Total system capacity .................................................................................................................. 18.0 qts (17.0 L)
Refill with or without filter change..................................................................................................11.1 qts (10.5 L)
Specification ........................................................................................................... Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra
4 Wheel Drive
Total system capacity ...................................................................................................................20.5 qts (19.4 L)
Refill with or without filter change .................................................................................................13.7 qts (12.9 L)
Specification .............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra
4 Wheel Drive Powershift
Total system capacity ....................................................................................................................19.0 qts (17.9 L)
Refill with or without filter change..................................................................................................12.0 qts (11.3 L)
Specification .............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra

FRONT DRIVE AXLE - 4 WHEEL DRIVE

580M and 580 Super M
Capacity - center bowl ......................................................................................................................5.8 qts (5.5 L)
Capacity - each wheel end ............................................................................................................ 0.75 qt (0.71 L)
Capacity - total ..................................................................................................................................7.3 qts (6.9 L)
Specification...................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140
580 Super M +
Capacity - center bowl ......................................................................................................................6.7 qts (6.3 L)
Capacity - each wheel end ............................................................................................................ 0.63 qt (0.59 L)
Capacity - total ................................................................................................................................7.96 qts (7.5 L)
Specification...................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140
590 Super M and 590 Super M +
Capacity - center bowl ......................................................................................................................7.1 qts (6.7 L)
Capacity - each wheel end ............................................................................................................ 0.69 qt (0.65 L)
Capacity - total ................................................................................................................................8.48 qts (8.0 L)
Specification...................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140

REAR AXLE
580M, 580 Super M
Capacity .......................................................................................................................................14.4 qts (13.6 L)
Specification .......................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140
580 Super M +, 590 Super M, 590 Super M +
Capacity .......................................................................................................................................19.7 qts (18.6 L)
Type of Fluid ........................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
(Brake fluid supplied by the transmission system)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-7

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE CHART

FREQUENCY IN HOURS

LUBRICATE

REPLACE
SERVICE

NUMBER

CHANGE
SERVICE POINTS

CHECK
INITIAL

CLEAN
INTERVAL

DRAIN
PAGE

5-11 Service Air Filter If Warning Lamp Is On AR

5-11 Replace Hydraulic Filter If Warning Lamp Is On AR
5-11 Tire Condition And Air Pressure AR
AS REQUIRED
5-11 Seat Slides AR
5-11 Coolers & Engine Area For Debris AR
5-12 Water Separator Drain If Warning Lamp is On AR AR
5-13 Initial Belt Tension 10 10
6-6 Initial Wheel Torque 10 10
10 Hours
5-16 Engine Oil Level 10
5-17 Loader - Backhoe - Extendahoe Fittings 10
20 Hours 5-22 Transmission - Rear Axle - 4wd Front Axle 20 20
5-23 4 In 1 Bucket Pivots & Fittings 50
5-23 Water Separator 50
50 Hours 5-24 Coolant Reservoir (Deaeration Reservoir) 50
5-24 Hydraulic Reservoir 50
5-25 Front Axle Pivots 50
5-26 Initial Hydraulic Filter 100 100
5-27 Initial Transmission Filter 100 100
100 Hours
5-28 Initial Fuel Filters 100 100
5-33 Extendahoe & Swing Pedals - If Equipped 100
5-34 Clean Battery 250
5-34 Alternator Belt Tension 250
5-35 4wd Front Axle Fluid & Breather 250
5-36 Rear Axle Oil Level & Breather 250
250 Hours 5-37 Fuel Tank - Water & Sediment 250
5-37 Transmission Fluid Level 250
5-38 4wd Shaft - If Equipped 250
5-38 Rear Axle Drive Shaft 250
5-38 Lubricate Air Compressor Seals 250
5-39 Inspect The Rops & Seat Mount 500
5-39 Fuel Filters 500
500 Hours
5-40 Engine Oil & Filter
5-41 Operator Seat 500 500
5-42 Hydraulic Fluid & Filter 1000
5-43 Battery Fluid 1000
5-43 Cab Intake Filters 1000
5-44 Rear Axle Fluid 1000
1000 Hours
5-45 Transmission Fluid & Filter 1000
5-47 Engine Air Filter 1000
5-46 Front Axle Oil 1000
5-43 Engine Valves & CCV Filter 1000 1000
2000 Hours 5-48 Cooling System 2000 2000 2000
Figure 12

5-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

CASE FAMILY LUBRICATION AND SERVICE PRODUCTS

BD08A523 Figure 13
For the very best protection of your investment use the Case Family of Lubrication and Service Products. Contact
your Dealers for these products and any questions you might have about your machines service and lubrication
requirements.
SYSTEMGARD LUBRICATION ANALYSIS Before you service this machine and before you
PROGRAM dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always
remember the environment.
Ask your Case dealer about the lubricant analysis
program, Systemgard. Through this service, your Do not put oil or fluids into the ground or into
lubricants are tested in an independent laboratory. containers that can leak.
You simply remove a sample of lubricant from your Check with your local environmental or recycling
machine and send the sample to the Systemgard center or your Case dealer for correct disposal
laborator y. After the sample is processed, the information.
laboratory will report back to you and guide you with
You must follow local, state and regional regulations
maintenance requirements. Systemgard can help
when disposing of fluids, filters, fuels and lubricants.
support your equipment up time and provide you with
a service that can pay back dividends when you
trade for another piece of Case equipment.

Figure 14

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-9

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

ENGINE HOOD TO CLOSE

Make sure the engine is off before opening the hood.
TO OPEN

BD03H043 Figure 17
1. Lower the hood.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the hood parts,
BD03H046 Figure 15 always close the hood before moving the loader.
1. Turn handle counterclockwise to release.

BD03H045 Figure 18
BD03H043 Figure 16
2. Turn the handle clockwise to lock.
2. Lift hood and rotate forward.

5-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

AS REQUIRED SERVICE
As required service and maintenance items are HYDRAULIC FILTER REPLACEMENT
those that may not fall into specific hourly intervals. In
most instances these items are As Required due to
the work environment that the machine and its
components have been working in. If you have any
questions about service intervals or as required
service contact your Dealer.
ENGINE AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT

BD05C037 Figure 20
Replace the hydraulic filter if this lamp illuminates
when the engine is running.
See page 5-26 in this chapter for detailed procedure.
TIRE PRESSURE AND CONDITION
Check the condition and pressure of the tires as
necessary. Tires will loose air on a regular basis.
Check the tire pressure and condition more often
when working in extreme conditions or weather.
See page 6-5 in the Maintenance Chapter of this
BD05C037 Figure 19
manual.
Replace the air filters if this lamp illuminates when NOTE: Tire inflation pressure affects the amount of
the engine is running. See page 5-47 in this Chapter weight that a tire may carry.
for detailed procedure.
SEAT INSPECTION, LUBRICATION AND
After replacing the filters and cleaning the housing, CLEANING
reset the lamp by pushing the button located behind
the filter housing. Check the condition of the seat cover and the moving
parts as necessary. Lubricate the seat slides. See
page 6-10 in the Maintenance Chapter of this
manual.
COOLERS AND ENGINE COMPARTMENT CLEAN
OF DEBRIS
Check the radiator, coolers and engine compartment
for build up of debris, dirt and material that might
impede cooling components.
See page 5-48 in this chapter for instructions to
access the radiator and coolers.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-11

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

AS REQUIRED SERVICE
WATER SEPARATOR DRAIN 4
On SM and SM + machines the operator will be
warned that water is in the fuel system by the Engine
Fault Lamp and the Display.

BD08A310 Figure 23
2 4. WIRE CONNECTOR CLASP
The wire connector attached to the bottom of the
drain must be removed before the drain is loosened.
Press on the wire clasp that holds the connector to
the drain and remove.
Figure 21
Hold a small container under the water separator and
1. ENGINE FAULT LAMP loosen the drain valve.
2. FUEL IN WATER SYMBOL
Close the drain valve.
If this condition exists you must drain the water
separator and check the fuel tank.
Park the machine on a firm, level surface with the
backhoe in the transport position.
Place the loader bucket down on the surface with the
bottom of the bucket parallel to the ground.

1
BD00F099 Figure 24
5. FUEL TANK DRAIN

If you find water or sediment, loosen the drain plug at

the bottom of the fuel tank. After water and sediment
are removed, tighten the plug.
2 3

BD08A309 Figure 22
1. WATER SEPARATOR
2. WATER DRAIN
3. WIRE CONNECTOR

5-12 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 10 HOURS 580M

INITIAL BELT TENSION CHECK
Check the tension of a new
fan/alternator/air-conditioning belt after the first 10
hours of operation.
SM and SM+ Machines

BD08AB049
Figure 27
Check the belt with a belt tension gauge, and adjust
the belt to 45 to 55 pound force (61 to 74 newton).
Check the belt at the location shown by the arrow,
BD08A307 Figure 25
above.
Check the belt with a belt tension gauge, and adjust
the belt to 90 to 110 pound force (122 to 149
newton). Check the belt at the location shown by the
arrow, above.
1

2
1
2

3 2

BD08B049 Figure 28
BD08A306 Figure 26 1. BRACKET PIVOT BOLT
2. COMPRESSOR BRACKET PIVOT BOLTS
1. BRACKET PIVOT BOLT
2. ADJUSTMENT BOLT LOCK NUT If adjustment is necessary:
3. ADJUSTMENT BOLT
1. Loosen the bracket pivot bolt (1).
If adjustment is necessary:
2. Loosen the two compressor bracket pivot bolts
1. Loosen the pivot bolt (1). (2).
2. Loosen the lock nut (2). 3. Pry the compressor bracket out away from the
3. Turn the adjustment bolt clockwise to tighten the machine to tighten the belt. Allow it to move
belt. Turn the adjustment bolt counterclockwise inboard to loosen.
to loosen the belt. 4. Tighten the compressor bracket pivot bolts (2).
4. When adjustment is complete, tighten the 5. Tighten the bracket pivot bolt (1).
adjustment bolt lock nut (2) and the bracket pivot
bolt (1).

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-13

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

WHEEL MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUE

Front Wheels Rear Wheels
When the machine is new or when a wheel is Torque Specification
removed for service, check the wheel nuts or bolts Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 lb. ft. (305 Nm)
every 10 hours of operation until the wheel nuts or
bolts remain tight.
1
Torque Specification 8
5
2WD Front Wheels 115 to 150 lb. ft. (156 to 203 Nm)
4WD Front Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 185 lb. ft. (251 Nm) 4
9

Torque wheels in a crossing pattern. 10

3
1 6
8 7
2
5
BD05C048 Figure 30
4
REAR WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE
3 1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8)
6 and rear wheels have (10).
7 2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence
2
shown until the wheel is snug against the axle
hub.
BD05C047 Figure 29
FRONT WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE
3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence
shown, to a torque of 100 pound - feet (136 Nm).
1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8)
and rear wheels have (10). 4. Then, tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence
shown, again, to a torque of 200 pound - feet
2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence (271 Nm).
shown until the wheel is snug against the axle
hub. 5. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in
the sequence shown, an additional 30 degrees.
3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence This will set the required pre-load on the rear
shown, to a torque of 90 pound - feet (122 Nm). wheel mounting nuts.
4. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in
IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen
the sequence shown, an additional 90 degrees.
when the torque is checked is a minimum of 225
This will set the required pre-load on the front
pound - feet (305 Nm).
wheel mounting nuts.
IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen
when the torque is checked is a minimum of 185
pound - feet (251 Nm).

5-14 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY

Engine Oil Selection
Case Akcela No. 1 Engine Oil is recommended for use in your Case Engine. Case Akcela Engine Oil will lubricate
your engine correctly under all operating conditions.
If Case Akcela No. 1 Multi-Viscosity or Single Viscosity Engine Oil is not available, use a commercial oil meeting
API engine oil service category CI-4 (preferred) or CH-4.
See the chart below for recommended vicosity at ambient temperature ranges.
NOTE: Do not put Performance Additives or other oil additive products in the engine crankcase. The oil change
intervals given in this manual are according to tests with Case Akcela lubricants.

BC07N452 Figure 31

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-15

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY

ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK
Specification . . . . . . . . Case Akcela No. 1 - 15W-40 4
Check the engine oil level before you start the engine 3
each day or before the start of each 10 hour shift.
Always check the oil level with the engine stopped
and when the machine is on level ground.
Make sure the oil has had time to drain down into the
pan before checking, in order to get an accurate
reading.
Push the engine oil level dipstick completely in and
pull out to check the oil level.
SM and SM+ Machines
Figure 34
3. DIPSTICK MIN MARK
4. DIPSTICK MAX MARK
1
If the oil level is below the MAX mark, add oil to raise
the oil level up to the MAX mark.

BD07J082 Figure 32
1. ENGINE OIL FILL LOCATION
2. ENGINE OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK

580M

BD08B450 Figure 33

5-16 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 10 HOURS
LOADER - BACKHOE AND MACHINE GREASE
FITTINGS
Lubricate these pivot points, pins and fittings every
10 hours or operation or each day. If you operate in
severe conditions, lubricate more often. Always clean 3
the fittings before lubricating.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

1
3
4 BD00F109 Figure 38
3. Bucket Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5
5

2 2
6

BC00H033 Figure 35 BD00F106 Figure 39

4. Bucket Cylinder Trunnion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

6 5
6
BD00F104 Figure 36
1. Lift Arm Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (2 ea. side)
BD00F107 Figure 40
5. Bucket Cylinder Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
6. Bucket Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Extendahoe slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 sides

BD00F105 Figure 37
2. Lift Cylinder - Closed / Rod End . . .4 (2 ea. side)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-17

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 10 HOURS

20 21
7 10 11
13
8 9
14 17
3
15

6 2
1 5 4 12 19 17 16 18
BC00H034 Figure 41
Specification ........................................................................................................................... Case Moly 251 EP-M
Lubricate the backhoe pivot points every 10 hours of operation or each day. If you operate in severe conditions,
lubricate more often. Clean the fittings before lubricating.

5
1
2 6
BD00F111 Figure 42 BD00F111 Figure 44
1. Stabilizer Cylinder Closed End . . . 2 (1 ea. side) 5. Upper Swing Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Boom Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1 ea. side) 6. Lower Swing Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3
7

4
3
BD00F111 Figure 43 BD00F121 Figure 45
3. Trunnion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (2 ea. Side) 7. Boom Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4. Swing Cylinder Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8. Boom Cylinder - Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

5-18 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 10 HOURS

20 21
7 10 11
13
8 9
14 17
3
15

6 2
1 5 4 12 19 17 16 18

Figure 46

9
13

BD00F120 Figure 47 BD00F119 Figure 49

9. Dipper Cylinder - Closed End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 13. Bucket Cylinder Closed End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

11 14

10

12

BD00F116 Figure 48 BD00F114 Figure 50

10. Boom Cylinder - Closed End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14. Bucket Cylinder Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
11. Dipper Cylinder - Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
12. Dipper Pivot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1 ea. Side)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-19

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 10 HOURS

20 21
7 10 11
13
8 9
14 17
3
15

6 2
1 5 4 12 19 17 16 18
BC00H034 Figure 51

16

15

16 19
BD00F114 Figure 52 BD00F115 Figure 55
15. Bucket Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 19. Extendable Dipper . . . . . . 2 (Top and Bottom of
16. Bucket Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Extendable Dipper, Bottom Not Shown)

17

17

BD00F114 Figure 53
17. Bucket Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (2 ea. Side)
10 HRS

18
BD00F114 Figure 54
18. Bucket Pivot (Without Coupler) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

5-20 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 20 HOURS
INITIAL TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Check the fluid level of the transmission after the first
20 hours of operation on a new machine or after a
component rebuild.
The engine must be running for this procedure. 2 3
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Hy-Tran Ultra
2/WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0 qts. (17.0 L)
4/WD Standard Transmission . . . . 20.5 qts. (19.4 L)
4/WD Powershift Transmission . . . . 19.0 qts (18.0 L)

WARNING: Rotating fan and belts: Contact

will cause injury. Keep clear.
Figure 56
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with BD08A464 Figure 58
the swing lock pin in transport position. 2. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK H MARK
3. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK L MARK
3. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground
The fluid level should be between the H and L. Do
with the bottom surface of the bucket parallel to
not fill above the H mark.
the ground.
INITIAL REAR AXLE FLUID CHECK
4. Place all drive controls in neutral.
Check the oil level of the rear axle after the first 20
5. Engage the park brake switch to set the park hours of operation with a new machine or after a
brake. component rebuild.
Specification . . . . . . . Case Transaxle SAE 80W140

1
1

BD08A458 Figure 57
1. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK
BD08A457 Figure 59
1. REAR AXLE OIL CHECK/FILL PLUG
1. Place the machine on a firm level surface.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
the swing lock pin in transport position.
3. Slowly remove the oil check/fill plug. Oil should
be even with the plug orifice.
4. Add oil, if necessary and replace the plug.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-21

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 20 HOURS
INITIAL 4WD FRONT AXLE FLUID CHECK
Check the oil level of the front wheel drive axle after
the first 20 hours of operation with a new machine or 2
after a component rebuild.
Specification . . . . . . .Case Transaxle Fluid 80W140

You must check the center bowl and planetary ends.

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
the swing lock pin in transport position.
3. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground
with the bottom surface of the bucket parallel to
the ground.
Figure 61
4. Place all drive controls in neutral. 2. CENTERBOWL CHECK/FILL PLUG

5. Raise the wheels about 1 inch (25 mm) above 11. Slowly, remove the plug from the centerbowl. Oil
the surface with the loader. should be even with the orifice.
12. Add oil, if necessary and install the plug.

BD08A455
Figure 60
1. CHECK/FILL PLUG

6. Rotate each wheel so that the oil level plug is in

the position shown above.
7. Lower the loader to place the wheels on the
surface.
8. Slowly, remove the plug. Oil should be even with
the plug orifice.
9. If necessary, add oil and install the plug.
10. Repeat the procedure for the other wheel.

5-22 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 50 HOURS
4 - IN - 1 BUCKET PIVOTS AND FITTINGS FUEL FILTER CHECK
Lubricate the 4 - In - 1 bucket pivots and fittings every On 580M machines check the fuel filter for water or
50 hours of operation. sediment every 50 hours of operation.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

1 2

2
Figure 63
1. FUEL FILTER
3 2. FUEL FILTER DRAIN
BD08A308 Figure 62 1. Hold a suitable container under the fuel filter
1. 4-IN-1 Bucket Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 (1 ea. side) drain and capture a small amount of fuel to
2. 4-IN-1 Bucket Cylinder Rod End . . .2 (1 ea. side) inspect for water and sediment.
3. 4-IN-1 Bucket Cylinder Closed End 2 (1 ea. side) If water or sediment is found, check the fuel tank.

EXTENDAHOE SLIDES
Lubricate the extendahoe slides every 50 hours of
operation.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M
Extend the dipper and place the boom and arm down
on the surface. Coat the slides with grease. 3

BD00F099 Figure 64
3. FUEL TANK DRAIN

2. If water or sediment was found in the fuel filter

slowly open the tank drain and inspect a small
quantity of fuel.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-23

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 50 HOURS HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR FLUID LEVEL

DEAERATION COOLANT TANK LEVEL Check the fluid level of the hydraulic system every 50
hours of operation or each week, whichever occurs
Check the deaeration reservoir fluid level every 50
first.
hours of operation. Check the level when the coolant
Specification . . . . . . . Case Akcela Hy-Tran ® Ultra
is cold and the engine is stopped.
Specification . . 50% ethylene glycol and 50% water

2
BD00F070 Figure 67
1. HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR SIGHT GAUGE
3
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
the swing lock pin in transport position.
BDO8A450 Figure 65
3. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground
1. DEAERATION RESERVOIR with the bottom surface of the bucket parallel to
2. HOT MAX MARK
the ground.
3. COLD MIN MARK
4. Place all drive controls in neutral.
The coolant level should be between the HOT MAX
and COLD MIN marks on the reservoir. Add coolant Check the level with the fluid cold or at ambient
as required to raise the coolant up to the HOT MAX temperature.
mark.

WARNING: Do not open or service the

coolant system when it is HOT. Allow the
system and components to cool BEFORE
servicing. Serious injury could result if you fail 2
to follow these instructions.
Figure 66
If you must add coolant to the system, open the
reservoir lid by SLOWLY turning the reservoir lid
counterclockwise until it is removed. It is not
necessary to remove the hoses in order to remove
the lid.

BD08A451 Figure 68
2. FULL COLD MARK

The hydraulic reservoir is full when hydraulic fluid

comes to the FULL COLD mark in the gauge.

5-24 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 50 HOURS
FRONT AXLE GREASE GITTINGS
Every 50 hours of operation, or more frequently, if the
machine has been working in water or extremely
muddy conditions, grease the king pins and the front
axle pivot.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

BD00F097 Figure 71
1 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FRONT AXLE
3. 4WD king pins . . . . . . . . . . 4 fittings (2 ea. side)
HYDRAULIC COUPLER LOCK PINS
If equipped, grease the hydraulic coupler lock pins
every 50 hours of operation.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Case Moly 251 EP-M
BD04D001 Figure 69
1. 2WD King Pins . . . . . . . . . 4 fittings (2 ea. side)

BD08A052 Figure 70
BK97K198 Figure 72
2. 2WD/4WD Front Axle Pivot remote fitting . . . . . 1
1. Hydraulic Coupler Lock Pin fittings 2 (1 ea. side)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-25

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 100 HOURS

INITIAL HYDRAULIC FILTER CHANGE
Replace the hydraulic filter after the first 100 hours
on a new machine or if a major component has been
rebuilt.
1
Always replace the filter if the Hydraulic Oil Filter
Warning Lamp remains illuminated.

BD08A524 Figure 74
6. Clean the area around the filter head area before
removing the old filter. Wear eye protection to
keep dirt and debris from eyes.
7. Have a suitable container ready to capture any
fluid that might leak or spill.
BD08A520 Figure 73 8. Use a filter wrench and remove the old filter.
1. HYDRAULIC FILTER Dispose of the filter in accordance with local,
The hydraulic filter is located under the left rear regional and federal regulations.
portion of the machine just in front of the rear axle. 9. Lubricate the gasket of the new filter with clean
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface. oil.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with 10. Install the new filter and turn clockwise until the
the swing lock pin installed for transport. gasket contacts the head of the filter assembly.
Continue to tighten the filter for 1/3 turn.
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the
bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the 11. Tighten the hydraulic reservoir cap.
surface. 12. Start the engine and after running for three or
4. Stop the engine. four minutes stop the engine.
5. Slowly open the hydraulic reservoir cap to help 13. Inspect for leaks.
relieve pressure.

5-26 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 100 HOURS

INITIAL TRANSMISSION FILTER
Replace the transmission filter after the first 100 9. Install the new filter and turn clockwise until the
hours on a new machine or if a major component has gasket contacts the head of the filter assembly.
been rebuilt. continue to tighten the filter another 1/3 turn.
1. Place the machine on a firm, level surface, with 10. Replace the transmission dipstick.
the backhoe in the transport position.
11. Start the engine and check for leaks around the
2. Place the loader bucket flat on the ground with filter.
the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the
surface. 12. Operate the machine in first and second gear for
a few minutes.
3. Stop the engine.
13. Park the machine on a level surface.
4. Clean the area around the transmission dipstick
and remove the dipstick. 14. Check the fluid level and add oil if necessary.

BD08A478 Figure 75
1. TRANSMISSION FILTER

5. Clean the area around the transmission filter

head. Clean the surrounding areas to help
eliminate contamination.
6. Place a suitable container under the filter to
capture oil during the procedure.
7. Remove the transmission filter. Use a filter
removal tool, if necessary.
8. Lubricate the gasket of the new filter with clean
oil.
IMPORTANT: Never use a filter removal tool to install
the filter.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-27

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 100 HOURS

INITIAL FUEL FILTER CHANGE
Replace the fuel filters after the first 100 hours of 1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
operation on a new machine or if a major component
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
has been rebuilt.
the swing lock pin installed for transport.
The fuel tank should be full for before proceeding.
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the
Air must be purged from the system, after fuel filters bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the
have been replaced. surface.
SM and SM+ Machines 4. Stop the engine.
5. Place the loader arms up and install the support
strut. See page 5-5 at the beginning of this
2
Lubrication, Filters and Fluids Chapter.
6. Raise the hood.
3 7. Open the fuel tank slightly to release pressure.
1 8. Have a suitable container ready to capture fuel
that might spill below the machine.
9. Clean the area around the filters and filter heads
of dirt and debris before removing filters.

BD08A309 Figure 76
1. WATER SEPARATOR - SM AND SM+ MACHINES
2. MANUAL PRIMING PUMP
3. AIR BLEED SCREW

BD08A309 Figure 78
5 6. WIRE CONNECTOR

WARNING: Never loosen fuel lines or

injector lines to bleed air from the system.
4 These lines are very high pressure and
serious injury could result.
Figure 79

BD08A522 Figure 77
4. PRIMARY FUEL FILTER - SM AND SM+ MACHINES
5. AIR BLEED SCREW

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to place fuel into the

new filters before installing.

5-28 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 100 HOURS

Replace Fuel Filters Sm And Sm+ Machines
Continued -

BD08A522 Figure 81
8. PRIMARY FUEL FILTER
BD08A310 Figure 80
7. WIRE CONNECTOR CLASP 17. Remove the primary filter by turning it
10. Remove the wire connector at the base of the counterclockwise. Use a filter removal tool, if
water separator. Press in on the connector clasp necessary.
to release. 18. Dispose of the filter following local, and regional
11. Turn the filter off, by removing the black collar. environmental laws.
Use a filter removal tool, if necessary. 19. Apply clean engine oil to the new fuel filter seal.
12. Dispose of the filter following local, and regional 20. Turn the new filter clockwise onto the filter head
environmental laws. until the filter gasket makes contact with the filter
13. Apply clean engine oil to the new fuel filter seal. body.

IMPORTANT: Never use a filter removal tool to install 21. Continue to tighten the filter and additional 1/2 to
the filter. 3/4 turn.

14. Turn the black collar until it snaps in place. 22. Tighten the fuel cap.
Air must now be purged from the system. See the
15. Continue to tighten the filter and additional 1/2 to
procedure on the following page.
3/4 turn.
16. Replace the wire connector by pushing it onto
the filter. You should hear it click into position.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-29

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

Purging Air From Sm And Sm+ Machines After Replacing Fuel Filters
The engine may now be cranked. DO NOT crank the
1 engine for more than 30 seconds.
If the engine will not star t, repeat the bleeding
process.
NOTE: The engine should be run for several minutes
before shut down.
2 The engine will start hard the next 4 or 5 times.
Generally, the engine will crank for 10 seconds the
second time it is started and about 5 seconds the
third.

BD08A521 Figure 82
1. PRE-FILTER HAND PRIMER
2. PRE-FILTER BLEED SCREW
1. Open the bleed screw on the filter head.
2. Activate the hand primer until fuel flows freely
from the bleed screw. Approximately 35 to 45
pumps.
3. Tighten the bleed screw.

BD08A522 Figure 83
3. PRIMARY FILTER BLEED SCREW

4. Loosen the bleed screw on the primary filter

head two or three turns. 13 mm tool required.
5. Activate the hand primer on the water separator
head until fuel flows freely from the screw.
Approximately 100 to 125 pumps.
6. Tighten the screw.
IMPORTANT: Air in the fuel system causes
excessive engine cranking to start. It is crucial that all
air be removed from the system.

5-30 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

INITIAL 100 HOURS 5. Place the loader arms up and install the support
strut. See page 5-5 at the beginning of this
Replace the fuel filters after the first 100 hours of
Lubrication, Filters and Fluids Chapter.
operation on a new machine or if a major component
has been rebuilt. 6. Raise the hood.
The fuel tank should be full for before proceeding. 7. Open the fuel tank slightly to release pressure.
Air must be purged from the system, after fuel filters 8. Have a suitable container ready to capture fuel
have been replaced. that might spill below the machine.
580M Machines 9. Clean the area around the filters and filter heads
of dirt and debris before removing filters.
10. Remove the In Line Filter (2).
11. Dispose of the filter in accordance with local and
regional environmental regulations.
1
IMPORTANT: Never add fuel to the new filters before
installing.
12. Replace with a new filter and make sure to follow
the arrow on the filter for proper direction.
13. Remove the primary filter. Use a filter removal
tool, if necessary.
14. Apply clean engine oil to the new fuel filter seal.
15. Turn the new filter clockwise onto the filter head
BD08B477 Figure 84
until the filter gasket makes contact with the filter
1. 580M PRIMARY FUEL FILTER body.
16. Continue to tighten the filter and additional 1/2 to
3/4 turn.
17. Tighten the fuel cap.
Air must now be purged from the system. See the
procedure on the following page.
2

BD08B478 Figure 85
2. IN LINE FUEL FILTER
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
the swing lock pin installed for transport.
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the
bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the
surface.
4. Stop the engine.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-31

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

Purging Air From 580M Machines After Replacing Fuel Filters

REMOVING AIR FROM THE FUEL SYSTEM
Air must be removed from the fuel system if one or
more of the following conditions have been met.
1
• The engine has stopped because the fuel tank ran
dry.
• If the fuel filters are replaced.
• If components of the fuel system have been
replaced or serviced.
• If the machine has been stored for three months
or more.

BD08B477 Figure 86
1. AIR BLEED SCREW
1. Loosen the bleed screw on the primary filter
head two or three turns. 13 mm tool required.

BD03F018 Figure 87
2. HAND PRIMER

2. Activate the hand primer pump until fuel with no

air flows from the air bleed screw.
3. Tighten the screw.

5-32 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 100 HOURS

EXTENDABLE DIPPER FOOT PEDAL FOOT CONTROLLED SWING PEDALS
Every 100 hours of operation, if equipped, grease the Every 100 hours of operation, if equipped, grease the
foot pedal control fitting. two fittings for the swing pedals.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Case Moly 251 EP-M

BD00F036 Figure 88 BD00H148 Figure 89

1. Remove the plastic plug on the backside of the 1. Remove the two plastic plugs from the backside
backhoe control tower to access the fitting. of the backhoe control tower to access the
fittings.
2. Wipe dirt and debris away from the fitting and
around the area. 2. Wipe dirt and debris away from the fitting and
around the area.
3. Grease the fitting and replace the plug.
3. Grease the fittings and replace the plugs.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-33

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 250 HOURS

BATTERY CLEANING BELT TENSION CHECK
Every 250 hours of operation check the batteries for Check the tension of a new
dirt, corrosion and damage. fan/alternator/air-conditioning belt after the first 10
See Batteries and Battery Safety on page 7-3 in the hours of operation and then every 250 hours of
Electrical Chapter of this manual for more details. operation.
Dirt mixed with electrolyte or moisture on the top of Inspect the belts for cracking, wear and damage.
the battery, can cause a discharged condition in the
See the procedure on page 5-13 of this chapter.
battery. Wear face protection and use one of the
following methods to clean the battery:
Use a 13 mm tool to remove the four bolts that
secure the battery compartment.
On machine equipped with the tool box, shown
below, it will be necessary to use a 16 mm tool to
release the tool box pivot before removing the battery
access door.

Figure 90

Figure 91
TWO BATTERY SYSTEM
Use Case Battery Saver. Follow the instructions on
the container. This cleaner does not require water.
Use baking soda or ammonia and flush the outside of
the battery with water. If you do not have Case
Battery Saver, use other special cleaners to prevent
corrosion on the battery terminals.

5-34 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 250 HOURS

4WD FRONT AXLE FLUID CHECK
Check the oil level of the front drive axle after the first
20 hours of operation with a new machine or after a
c o m p o n e n t r e bu i l d , th e n eve r y 2 5 0 ho u r s o f
operation.
You must check the planetary ends and the center
bowl.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . .Case Transaxle 80W140 2
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
the swing lock pin installed for transport. BD00F122 Figure 93
2. 4WD FRONT AXLE CHECK/FILL PLUG
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the
bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the 11. Slowly remove the check / fill plug on the axle,
surface. shown above. Oil should just be at the plug
4. Place all drive controls into Neutral. orifice.

5. With the loader control raise the front wheels 12. Add oil, if necessary and replace the plug.
about 1 inch above the surface. REAR AXLE BREATHER
6. Stop the engine. Clean the front axle breather every 250 hours of
operation. If you operate the machine in severe
conditions, clean it more frequently.

1 1

BD00F098 Figure 94
1. FRONT AXLE BREATHER
BD08A455 Figure 92
1. OIL CHECK/FILL PLUG
The front axle breather is located on the left side of
the front axle.
7. Rotate the wheels so the oil check / fill plug is in
1. Remove dirt and debris from the area around the
the position shown.
breather and clean with solvent.
8. Lower the loader control to bring the wheels to
2. Wear full face protection and blow dry with
the surface.
compressed air.
9. Slowly remove the check / fill plug. Oil should be
3. Spin the top cap to ensue that it is free to turn.
even with the orifice.
10. Add oil, if necessary, and replace the plug.
Follow the procedure for the other wheel end.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-35

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 250 HOURS REAR AXLE BREATHER

REAR AXLE OIL LEVEL Clean the rear axle breather every 250 hours of
Check the oil level in the center bowl and each operation. If you operate the machine in severe
planetary every 250 hours of operation. conditions, clean it more frequently.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . Case Transaxle 80W140
1. Park the machine on a level surface. Make sure
the direction control lever is in the NEUTRAL
position and the gear shift control lever is in the 1
NEUTRAL position.

1
BD05C032 Figure 96
1. REAR AXLE BREATHER
Remove dirt and debris from the area around the
breather and clean with solvent. Wear face protection
and blow dry with compressed air. Spin the top cap to
ensue that it is free to turn.

BD08A457
Figure 95
1. OIL CHECK/FILL PLUG

2. Slowly, remove the oil check/fill plug. Oil should

be just at the opening.
3. If necessary, add oil before replacing the plug.

5-36 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 250 HOURS

FUEL TANK 1
Every 250 hours of operation check the fuel tank for
water and sediment.

BD08A458 Figure 99
1. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK

5. Remove the dipstick by turning the dipstick

BD00F099 Figure 97 handle counterclockwise.
1. FUEL TANK DRAIN PLUG
With the machine on a firm, level surface place a
container under the tank drain plug and slowly
remove the plug.
TRANSMISSION FLUID 2 3
Check the transmission fluid every 250 hours of
operation.
Specification . . . . . . . . . Case Akcela Hy-Tran Ultra
The engine must be running for this check.

WARNING: Rotating fan and belts: Contact

will cause injury. Keep clear.
Figure 98
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface. BD08A464 Figure 100
2. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK HIGH MARK
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
3. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK LOW MARK
the swing lock pin installed for transport.
The fluid should be between the high and low mark. If
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the the fluid gets to the low mark add fluid.
bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the
surface. IMPORTANT: Do not overfill.

4. Place all drive controls into Neutral.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-37

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 250 HOURS LUBRICATE THE AIR CONDITIONING

COMPRESSOR SEALS
4WD FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT AND REAR
AXLE DRIVE SHAFT Every 250 hours of operation, run the air conditioning
to lubricate the compressor seals.
Every 250 hours of operation grease the front slip
spline and the rear axle drive shaft. Turn the air conditioning control to MAXIMUM for at
least 15 minutes. In temperatures below 32° F (0° C)
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Case Moly 251 EP-M
put a cover over the air conditioning condenser. This
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface. will make sure the refrigerant and lubricants in the
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with system will be at operating temperature.
the swing lock pin installed for transport.
WARNING: Rotating fan and belts: Contact
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the will cause injury. Keep clear.
bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the Figure 103
surface.
4. Place all drive controls into Neutral.
5. Stop the engine.

BD00F124 Figure 101

1. FRONT AXLE FITTING

6. Grease the fitting.

BD00F128 Figure 102

2. REAR AXLE DRIVE SHAFT

7. Grease the fitting.

5-38 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 500 HOURS

ROPS CAB - CANOPY - SEAT MOUNT REPLACE FUEL FILTERS
Every 500 hours of operation inspect the ROPS (Roll Replace the fuel filters every 500 hours of operation
Over Protective Structure) Cab or Canopy and Seat or if there is a loss of engine power.
Mounting system for damage and proper hardware
torque. You must bleed air from the system after replacing
the fuel filter.
Check the torque of the ROPS mounting bolts.
IMPORTANT: Pre-filling the filters is not
Front and rear ROPS bolts should be torqued to:
recommended. Unfiltered fuel may cause debris to
220 to 264 pound feet (298 to 358 Nm) enter the system.
Every 500 hours of operation check the seat belt
mounting bolts and hardware for correct torque. WARNING: Never loosen fuel lines or
injector lines to bleed air from the system.
The seat belt is an important part of your ROPS. You
These lines are very high pressure and
must wear the seat belt at all times when you operate
serious injury could result.
the machine.
Figure 104
Before you operate the machine, always make sure See page 5-28 in this chapter for the procedure.
that the ROPS and operator’s seat belts are correctly
installed.
Keep shar p edges a nd ite ms that can cau se
damage, away from the belts. From time to time
check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack
take-up system and mounting bolts for damage.
Replace all parts that have damage or wear. Replace
belts that have cuts that can make the belt weak.
Keep seat belts clean and dry.
Clean belts only with a soap solution and warm
water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts because
this can make the belts weak.
See page 6-7 in the Maintenance Chapter of this
m a n u a l fo r RO P S a n d S e a t i n s p e c t i o n a n d
maintenance.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-39

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 500 HOURS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Change the engine oil and replace the filter after
ever y 500 hours of operation or once a year,
whichever occurs first.
Specification . . Case Akcela No. 1 15W-40 API CI-4 2
NOTE: For more complete removal of foreign
material, change the engine oil while the engine is
still warm from operation.
IMPORTANT: You must charge the turbocharger oil
lines before attempting to start the machine, after this
procedure.
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface. BD08A461 Figure 106
2. ENGINE OIL FILTER
2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with
the swing lock pin installed for transport. 10. Turn the oil filter counterclockwise to remove.
Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.
3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the
bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the 11. Discard the old filter in accordance with local and
surface. regional environmental codes.

4. Place all drive controls into Neutral. 12. Use a clean cloth and wipe the sealing surface of
the oil filter base to remove all dirt.
5. Raise the loader arms up and install the support
strut. See page 5-5 at the beginning of this 13. Apply a thin layer of clean grease or oil to the
chapter for the procedure. gasket of the new oil filter.

6. Stop the engine. 14. Turn the new oil filter onto the base until the
gasket makes contact with the base. Continue to
tighten the filter for 3/4 turn with your hand.
IMPORTANT: Do not use a filter wrench to install the
oil filter. An oil filter wrench can cause a leak if the
filter is dented.
15. Install the drain plug.
16. Put new oil into the engine.
1 17. Close the hood.

BD08A460 Figure 105

1. ENGINE OIL DRAIN PLUG (LEFT SIDE OF PAN)

7. Clean around the engine oil dipstick, oil pan drain

plug, engine fill cap and engine oil filter and
head.
8. Slowly open the engine oil drain plug and drain
into a suitable container.
9. Open the hood.

5-40 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 500 HOURS

OPERATOR SEAT
Inspect and lubricate the seat every 500 hours of
operation. Inspect the hardware that attach the seat
and the seat belt components to the ROPS.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .graphite grease

1 1

2 BD05E097 Figure 108

1. Tip the backrest fully forward.
2. Wipe the area clean with a rag.
3. Lubricate the tilt mechanism on each side with
BD05D015 Figure 107 graphite grease.
1. SEAT SLIDES SHOWN FROM REAR
2. BEARING AREA
Clean the seat slides and then apply graphite grease
to the slides.
Clean the bearing area of dirt and debris but, DO
NOT lubricate.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-41

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 1000 HOURS

HYDRAULIC FLUID AND FILTER
Change the hydraulic fluid and filter after 1000 hours
of operation or if a major component of the system
has been replaced or rebuilt.
2
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
This procedure requires that the fluid be near
operating temperature before draining the system.
See In Cold Weather with Cold Engine in Operation
Chapter page 4-6 for machine warm up.
1. Place the backhoe into the transport position,
with the swing lock pin in the transport position.
2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground, making
sure the bottom of the bucket is parallel to the BD08A524 Figure 110
Figure 111
ground.
8. Remove the hydraulic filter by turning
3. .Engage the parking brake and stop the engine. counterclockwise. Use a filter removal tool, if
4. Place a DO NOT OPERATE TAG on the key necessary.
switch. 9. Lubricate the gasket on the new filter with clean
5. Clean the areas around the hydraulic reservoir oil.
cap, the hydraulic reservoir drain plug and the 10. Install the new filter and turn clockwise until the
hydraulic filter. gasket makes contact with the filter head
assembly. Tighten the filter 1/3 turn more and
stop.
1
11. Install the hydraulic reservoir plug.
12. Put new Hy-Tran Ultra into the reservoir.
13. Replace the reservoir fill cap.
Before starting the engine, check:
• The new hydraulic filter was installed and is
tightened correctly.
• The hydraulic reservoir drain plug is installed
and tightened correctly.
14. Start the engine and operate the loader and
backhoe controls for three to four minutes.
15. Stop the engine and inspect for leaks.
Figure 109 16. Check the fluid level.
1. HYDRAULIC TANK CAP
IMPORTANT: When the hydraulic fluid is low, a small
6. SLOWLY remove the hydraulic reservoir fill cap. amount of hydraulic fluid will remain on the lower
7. Place a suitable container under the hydraulic portion of the sight gauge window. This condition
reservoir drain plug and SLOWLY remove the does not show a correct fluid level.
drain plug. Allow to drain while moving to the
next step.

5-42 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 1000 HOURS CAB INTAKE FILTERS

PUMP CHARGE PROCEDURE Clean and inspect the cab air intake filters every
1000 hours of operation.
In the hydraulic fluid supply to the pump has been
interrupted due to hydraulic fluid change, pump
replacement, or a broken line, see the Service
Manual or your Dealer for proper start up procedure.
Severe damage to the hydraulic pump is possible.
Contact your Dealer if you have any questions about
this procedure. 1
BATTERY FLUID
Check the battery fluid level every 1000 hours of
operation.

BD00F058 Figure 113

1. CAB INTAKE FILTER

• Remove the two thumb screws that hold the cab

air intake filter cover in place and set it aside.
• Pull the filter out and inspect for dirt and debris.
ENGINE VALVE ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the engine valves ever y 1000 hours of
operation.
BD08A477 Figure 112 Contact your Dealer for this procedure as it is
• Wear full coverage face protection prior to necessary to have special tools.
servicing the batteries.
CCV FILTER
• Remove the negative terminals.
R e p l a c e t h e C C V f i l t e r eve r y 1 0 0 0 h o u r s o f
• Clean the area around the battery caps before operation.
removing.
Contact your Dealer for this procedure or see the
• Check the fluid level in each cell by removing the
Repair Manual for this machine.
cap.
Fluid should be within 6 inches of the top. See the
instructions on the battery.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-43

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 1000 HOURS

REAR AXLE OIL
2
Change the rear axle oil ever y 1000 hours of
operation.
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . Case Transaxle 80W140
3
580M - 580SM capacity . . . . . . . . . 14.4 qts. (13.6 L)
580SM+ - 590SM - 590SM+. . . . . . 19.7 qts. (18.6 L)
Before changing the rear axle oil you should have
the axle oil to operating temperature.

BD08A457 Figure 115

2. REAR AXLE CHECK/FILL PLUG
3. REAR AXLE CENTER BOWL DRAIN PLUG

1 5. Clean the areas around the rear axle drain and

check/fill plug.

BD08A462 Figure 114

1. SWING LOCK PIN IN TRANSPORT POSITION 4
1. Place the backhoe into the transport position with
the swing lock pin installed.
2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground, making
sure the bottom of the bucket is parallel to the
ground.
3. Place the direction control lever and gear shift
lever into NEUTRAL.
4. Stop the engine.
BD08A463 Figure 116
4. LEFT REAR PLANETARY DRAIN PLUG

6. Clean the area around each planetary drain plug.

7. Place a suitable container under the rear axle
center bowl drain plug and slowly remove the
plug.
8. Place containers under the planetary drain plugs
and drain.
9. Replace the rear axle center bowl drain plug.
10. Replace both planetary drain plugs.
11. Remove the check/fill plug and fill the system
with Case Transaxle Fluid 80W140.

5-44 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 1000 HOURS 6. Have a suitable container ready and remove the
transmission filter.
TRANSMISSION OIL AND FILTER
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hy-Tran Ultra 7. Place a suitable container under the
transmission drain plug and SLOWLY remove the
Change the transmission fluid, replace the transmission drain plug.
transmission filter and clean the transmission
breather every 1000 hours of operation. 8. After all the oil has drained from the system,
lubricate the gasket of the new transmission filter
1. Place the machine on a level surface with the
with clean oil and install it. Tur n the filter
backhoe in the transport position and the loader
clockwise until the gasket contacts the filter head
bucket flat on the ground.
assembly. Continue to tighten the filter for 1/3
2. Stop the engine and place a Do Not Operate tag turn.
on the key switch.
9. Install the transmission drain plug.
3. Clean the area around the transmission dipstick
10. Fill the system with new Hy-Tran Ultra fluid.
area and remove the dipstick.
11. Start the engine and check for leaks around the
4. Clean the area around the transmission drain
filter.
plug.
12. Operate the machine in first and second gear for
several minutes.
13. Park the machine on a level surface and, with the
engine running, check the fluid level.
14. Add fluid, if necessary.
1

BD08A478 Figure 117

1. TRANSMISSION FILTER - PHOTO SHOWN LOOKING
STRAIGHT UP FROM UNDER THE FILTER

5. Clean the area around the transmission filter.

The transmission filter is located between the
right side chassis and the transmission.

Figure 118
1. STANDARD TRANSMISSION DRAIN NOTE: THE
POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION DRAIN IS IN THE SAME
LOCATION

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-45

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 1000 HOURS

FRONT AXLE OIL
Change the front axle oil ever y 1000 hours of
operation. 2
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . Case Transaxle 80W140
Have the oil to operating temperature prior to
draining. 3
1. Park the machine on a level surface with the
backhoe in the transport position and the loader
bucket flat on the ground with the bottom of the
bucket parallel to the surface.
2. Place the direction control lever and the gear
shift control in NEUTRAL.
3. Use the loader and raise the front wheels about 1 BD00F122 Figure 120
inch (25 mm) above the ground and stop the 2. CENTERBOWL CHECK/FILL PLUG
engine. 3. CENTERBOWL DRAIN PLUG

8. Slowly, remove the centerbowl check/fill plug.

9. Place a suitable container under the centerbowl
drain plug and slowly, remove the plug.
10. After the oil has drained from the axle, replace
the centerbowl drain plug.
11. Use the loader and raise the front wheels about 1
1 inch (25 mm) above the ground and stop the
engine.

4
BD08A479 Figure 119
1. OIL LEVEL CHECK/FILL PLUG IN THE DRAIN POSITION

4. Rotate both front wheels to the drain position,

shown above.
5. Slowly lower the wheels to the ground.
6. Clean the areas around the planetary plugs and
the areas around the center bowl, check/fill and
drain plugs.
7. Place a suitable container under the front wheel BD08A455 Figure 121
planetary drain plugs and slowly, remove the 4. OIL LEVEL CHECK/FILL PLUG IN CHECK POSITION
plugs.
12. Rotate both front wheels to the check/fill position
shown above and lower the wheels back to the
surface.
13. Fill the axle at the centerbowl check/fill plug and
at the planetary check/fill plugs with Akcela
Hy-Tran Ultra. Oil should just begin to flow out of
the openings, when at the proper level.
14. Install the three check/fill plugs.

5-46 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 1000 HOURS

ENGINE AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT
Change the engine air filter elements and clean the
air filter housing every 1000 hours of operation.
Always service the air filter elements if the air filter
restriction lamp illuminates and remains on.

BD08A486 Figure 124

5. Remove the primary filter.

BD08A480 Figure 122

1. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION WARNING LAMP

NOTE: The air filter restriction lamp must be reset

manually once it has illuminated because of air
restriction. Push the reset button located behind the
filter housing.
1. Raise the engine hood.
2. Clean the area around the outside front cover of BD08A487 Figure 125
the air filter housing. 6. Remove the secondary filter.
3. At this time, inspect the hose clamps and hose
component that attach to the air filter housing.

BD08A488 Figure 126

7. Clean the filter housing and cover of dirt and
debris.
BD08A481 Figure 123
4. Release the clips that secure the air filter 8. Replace the new filters in reverse order and
housing cover in place. secure the cover.
9. Start the engine and monitor the air filter
restriction lamp.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-47

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 2000 HOURS

COOLING SYSTEM FLUSH AND CLEAN
Drain, flush and replace the engine coolant every
2000 hours of operation or every year, whichever
comes first.
Specifications . . . . 50% ethylene glycol, 50% water
. . . . . . . . Cooling System Cleaner from your Dealer
System capacity 580M w/heater. . . 17.8 qts. (16.8 L)
580M w/o heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0 qts. (16.1 L)
All other Series 3 w/heater . . . . . . . 19.0 qts. (18.0 L)
w/o heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3 qts. (17.3 L)
DO NOT attempt to service the cooling system or any
component until it is cool.
BD08A518 Figure 129
WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the 4. Tip the grill up from the bottom and lift away from
deaeration cap is removed. To remove the the machine, as shown.
deaeration cap:
Let the system and components cool.
SLOWLY remove the cap by turning
counterclockwise in small increments.
Scalding can result from fast removal of the
deaeration cap.
Figure 127
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface, shut
the engine off and place a DO NOT OPERATE
tag on the key switch.
2. Wait for the system and components to cool.

1 BD08A489 Figure 130

1 5. Place a piece of hose onto the radiator drain
valve and drain into a suitable container. Open
the deaeration cap at this time.

BD08A490 Figure 128

1. GRILLE BUMPERS
2. RADIATOR GRILLE

3. Use a 16 mm tool and remove the 6 bolts that

secure the radiator bumpers and remove them.

BD08A519 Figure 131

6. Use a 13 mm tool and remove the two bolts that
secure the coolers. Swing the coolers out, as
shown, and clean of dirt and debris.

5-48 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

EVERY 2000 HOURS

Cooling System Flush and Clean continued -

7. Check the hoses, elbows, and system
components for wear or damage.
8. After cleaning, swing the coolers back in and
replace the two bolts.
9. After all the coolant has been drained, close the
drain valve, but leave the drain hose on.
10. Add Case Radiator Flush and follow the
directions on container.
11. After the Case Radiator Flush has been used,
close the radiator drain valve and remove the
hose.
12. Slowly add a mixture of 50% ethylene glycol and
50% water into the deaeration reservoir until the
level reaches between the COLD MIN and HOT
MAX mark on the tank.
13. Secure the deaeration cap and start the engine.
14. Run the engine for a few minutes and stop the
engine before it reaches operating temperature.
15. Check the system for leaks.
16. Start the engine again and allow the engine to
reach operating temperature.
17. Stop the engine and check the deaeration
reservoir.
18. If necessary, allow the components to cool and
add coolant to bring the reservoir level up.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 5-49

 CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

5-50 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

Chapter 6
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SERVICE BRAKE CHECK (FOOT BRAKES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

PARKING BRAKE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
LOADER RETURN-TO-DIG ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
FAN DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
TIRE PRESSURE AND SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
WHEEL MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
RIDE CONTROL ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
PILOT CONTROL ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF ROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
SEAT MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
WELDING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
4 IN 1 BUCKET CONTROL SWITCH DETENT ENABLE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 6-1

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

6-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS
SERVICE BRAKE CHECK (FOOT BRAKES)
Check the operation of the service brakes on a hard
level surface after the first 100 hours of operation.
• Make sure the area is clear of other persons.
• Lock both pedals together with the brake pedal
lock and shift the transmission to second gear.
• Drive the machine forward at full throttle.
• When the machine is moving at full speed, remove
your foot from the throttle and stop the machine.
The machine must stop smoothly in a straight line
and the brake pedal effort must feel firm.
IMPORTANT: See the repair manual for this machine
or see your dealer if the machine does not stop in a
1
straight line or if the brake pedal effort feels soft.
BD00H149 Figure 2
PARKING BRAKE CHECK 1. ADJUSTING BOLTS

Check the operation of the parking brake after the 4. Loosen the adjusting bolts for the return-to-dig
first 100 hours of operation. switch and move the switch in the slot so that the
roller on the switch is resting on the edge of the
• Make sure the area is clear of other persons.
cam on the loader arm.
• Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission
5. Tighten the bolts.
to third gear.
6. Start the engine, raise the loader bucket to full
• Shift the transmission direction control to
height, and dump the bucket.
FORWARD and increase the engine speed to
1500 rpm. 7. Put the loader control lever in the
RETURN-TO-DIG position. The loader bucket
The machine must not move. will lower to the ground.
IMPORTANT: If the machine does move, contact 8. Stop the engine.
your Dealer immediately or see the Repair Manual
9. Check the position of the loader bucket. If the
for these machines.
bucket is not in the correct position, see steps 10
and 11.
LOADER RETURN-TO-DIG ADJUSTMENT
10. Move the return-to-dig switch rearward if the
1. Park the machine on a level surface and apply
bucket did not roll back far enough.
the parking brake.
11. Move the return-to-dig switch forward if the
2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground and make
bucket rolled back too far.
sure the bottom of the bucket is at the desired
digging angle. NOTE: When moving the switch bracket forward or
rearward for adjustment, be sure the bracket is
pushed in toward the machine as the bolts are
tightened. This will assure full contact of the switch
with the actuating cam.
12. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until the bucket
returns to the correct position.

BD00G048 Figure 1
3. Stop the engine.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 6-3

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

FAN DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT PLASTIC AND RESIN PARTS

1. Park the machine on a level surface and apply Avoid using gasoline, paint thinner, etc., when
the parking brake. cleaning plastic parts, console, instrument cluster,
2. Raise the loader lift arms to full height and install etc.
the loader lift arm support strut on the cylinder Use only water, mild soap, and a soft cloth when you
rod. See page 5-5 in the Lubrication, Filters and clean these parts.
Fluids Chapter of this manual.
Using gasoline, thinners, etc., can cause
3. Stop the engine, remove the key, and open the
discoloration, cracking, or deformation of the part
hood.
being cleaned.
4. Install a 1/2 inch breaker bar in the tension pulley
bracket.

BD03F029 Figure 3
1. TENSION PULLEY BRACKET
5. Push the breaker bar up just enough to release
the tension on the drive belt. Remove the drive
belt from the water pump pulley first and then
from the other pulleys.
6. Remove the four cap screws, flat washers, and
lock washers that fasten the pump drive coupling
to the crankshaft pulley.
7. Move the pump drive coupling toward the
hydraulic pump.
8. Remove the old drive belt.
9. Install the new drive belt on the water pump
pulley and crankshaft pulley.
10. Align the coupling with the crankshaft pulley.
11. Install the cap screws, flat washers, and lock
w a s h e r s t h a t fa s t e n t h e c o u p l i n g t o t h e
crankshaft pulley. Tighten the cap screws from
95 to 114 Nm (70 to 85 pound-feet).
12. Use the breaker bar to move the tension pulley
bracket just far enough to install the drive belt on
the alternator pulley.
13. Remove the breaker bar and close the hood.
14. Lower the loader bucket to the ground.

6-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

TIRE PRESSURE AND SERVICE

WARNING: Exploding tires and / or rim parts can cause injury or death. Keep yourself and others out of
the DANGER AREA. Stand on the tread side of the tire. Always use the correct air pressure and follow the
instructions in this manual for adding air or servicing the tires.
Figure 4

WARNING: Do NOT weld to wheel or rim when a tire is installed. Welding will cause an explosive air / gas
mixture that will be ignited with high temperatures. This can happen to tires inflated or deflated. Removing
air or breaking the bead is not adequate. The tire MUST be completely removed from the rim prior to
welding.
Figure 5

WARNING: Explosive separation of the tire and / or rim parts can cause injury or death. When tire service
is necessary, have a qualified tire mechanic service the tire.
Figure 6
IMPORTANT: Do not inflate a tire above the manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on the tire. Contact your
Dealer if you have any questions about the proper tire pressure for these machines.
It is recommended that you have a qualified tire
mechanic ser vice the tires and rims on these
machines. It is recommended that you have this
mechanic inflate the tires.
Before you add air to a tire:
• Inspect the tire for damaged tread or side walls
• Inspect the rim for damage.
• Confirm that the wheel is mounted to the machine
properly.

BD03H044 Figure 7
• Use an air hose with a remote shutoff and stand
behind the tire tread when adding air.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 6-5

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

WHEEL MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUE Rear Wheels

Front Wheels Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 lb. ft. (305 Nm)

When the machine is new or when a wheel is

removed for service, check the wheel nuts or bolts 1
8
every 10 hours of operation until the wheel nuts or 5
bolts remain tight.
2WD Front Wheels 115 to 150 lb. ft. (156 to 203 Nm)
4
9
4WD Front Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 185 lb. ft. (251 Nm)

10
Torque wheels in a crossing pattern. 3
6
7
1 2
8
BD05C048 Figure 9
5
REAR WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE
4
1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8)
3 and rear wheels have (10).
6 2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence
shown until the wheel is snug against the axle
7 2 hub.
3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence
BD05C047 Figure 8
shown, to a torque of 100 pound - feet (136 Nm).
FRONT WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE
4. Then, tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence
1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8) shown, again, to a torque of 200 pound - feet
and rear wheels have (10). (271 Nm).
2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence 5. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in
shown until the wheel is snug against the axle the sequence shown, an additional 30 degrees.
hub. This will set the required pre-load on the rear
3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence wheel mounting nuts.
shown, to a torque of 90 pound - feet (122 Nm).
IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen
4. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in when the torque is checked is a minimum of 225
the sequence shown, an additional 90 degrees. pound - feet (305 Nm).
This will set the required pre-load on the front
wheel mounting nuts.
IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen
when the torque is checked is a minimum of 185
pound - feet (251 Nm).

6-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

RIDE CONTROL ACCUMULATOR PUMP CHARGE PROCEDURE

If the ride control accumulator must be replaced for If the hydraulic fluid supply to the pump has been
any reason, always follow the instruction on the decal interrupted, due to hydraulic fluid change, pump
located on the accumulator mounting plate. replacement, or a broken line, see the Repair
Never disconnect the hydraulic line between the Manual or your Case Dealer for proper start up
accumulator and the solenoid valves without first procedure.
discharging all hydraulic pressure from the hydraulic Severe damage to your machine may result.
system. Always refer to the accumulator decal
located at the right, in the safety section of this ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
manual or the decal located on the accumulator
mounting plate. Your machine has a roll-over protective structure
Refer to the repair manual for complete instructions (ROPS). A ROPS label is fastened to the structure.
on testing the accumulator and solenoid. The ROPS label shows the serial number of the
ROPS, gross weight, approval, regulation and model
numbers of the machine.
ROPS CANOPY LABEL

384260A1 Figure 10

WARNING: The accumulator on this

machine contains highly pressurized
nitrogen gas. If the accumulator system does
not function correctly, replace the
! accumulator. DO NOT attempt to repair the
accumulator, only install a new one. Injury or
death can result if you do not follow these BD00J045 Figure 12
instructions. SEAT BELT
SA142 Figure 11
The seat belt is an important part of your ROPS. You
PILOT CONTROL ACCUMULATOR must wear the seat belt at all times when you operate
the machine.
The Pilot Control Accumulator allows the backhoe to
be lowered to the ground with the engine off. It also Before you operate the machine, always make sure
allows pressure to be relieved from backhoe that the ROPS and operator’s seat belts are correctly
hydraulic circuits. installed.
Keep sh ar p edges and items that can cause
To verify proper operation of the accumulator:
damage, away from the belts. From time to time
1. Start the engine, operate the backhoe and raise check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack
the dipper so that it is parallel to the ground. take-up system and mounting bolts for damage.
2. Shut off the engine and turn the key switch back Replace all parts that have damage or wear. Replace
to ON but DO NOT start the engine. belts that have cuts that can make the belt weak.
3. Turn the pilot control switch on by pushing it to Keep seat belts clean and dry.
the enable position. Clean belts only with a soap solution and warm
4. Move each joystick in ONE complete circle, water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts because
stopping in the neutral, (center) position. this can make the belts weak.

5. Lower the dipper. If the dipper lowers, the

accumulator is working correctly.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 6-7

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

ROPS CAB LABEL MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF ROPS

Every 500 hours of operation check the ROPS
canopy, ROPS cab, and lower frame hardware for
proper torque.
1. Check the torque of the ROPS mounting bolts. If
necessary, tighten the bolts to the correct torque.
See the following page.
2. Check the operator’s seat and the mounting
parts for the seat belt. Tighten the bolts to the
correct torque. Replace the parts that have wear
or damage.
3. Check for cracks, rust, or holes in the ROPS and
BD00J034 Figure 13 ROPS parts. Age, weather, and accidents can
cause damage to the ROPS and ROPS parts. If
you have any doubt about the ROPS system, see
your dealer.

MOUNTING BOLTS FOR ROPS CANOPY, ROPS CAB AND LOWER FRAME

BC00J080 Figure 14
1. 220 TO 264 POUND-FEET (298 TO 358 NM)

6-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

DAMAGE TO THE ROPS

If the machine has rolled over or the ROPS has been in some other type of accident (such as hitting an overhead
object during transport), you must replace the damaged ROPS components to get as much protection as you had
originally.
After an accident, check the following for damage.
1. ROPS cab or ROPS canopy.
2. Lower ROPS frame.
3. Operator’s seat.
4. Seat belt mounting and seat belt.
Before you operate the machine, replace all ROPS components that are damaged.
See the parts catalog or your dealer for components that are replaceable.
DO NOT TRY TO WELD OR STRAIGHTEN THE ROPS

WARNING: Improper ROPS inspection or maintenance can cause injury or death. Do the recommended
! ROPS inspection shown in this manual. If you must replace the ROPS, ROPS parts, or ROPS mounting
hardware, use only the replacement parts shown in the Case parts catalog for this machine.
SA029 Figure 15

WARNING: Do not modify ROPS in any manner. Unauthorized modifications such as welding, drilling, cutting
! or adding attachments can weaken the structure and reduce your protection. Replace ROPS if subjected to
roll-over or damage. Do not attempt to repair.
SB026 Figure 16

WARNING: If you operate this machine without a ROPS and the machine rolls over, you can be injured or
! killed. Remove the ROPS only for service or replacement. Do not operate this machine with the ROPS
removed.
SA027 Figure 17

WARNING: Adding additional weight (attachments, etc.) to the machine can cause injury or death. Do not
! exceed the gross weight printed on the ROPS label.
SA028 Figure 18

WARNING: You are protected by the ROPS system on this machine (Roll-Over Protective Structure). The
seat belt is an important part of that ROPS system. Before you operate this machine, always fasten the
! seat belt. If the machine rolls over and you DO NOT have the seat belt fastened, you can be crushed by
the ROPS or the machine.
SA080 Figure 19

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 6-9

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

SEAT MAINTENANCE
As necessary, for seat cushions vinyl or cloth, treat
as automobile or home product with the same cover.
3
Always try to clean the stain or loose dirt as soon as 3
possible. Brush and vacuum loose dirt. Use cold
wa t e r o n fa b r i c s t a i n s f i r s t a n d t h e n q u a l i t y
automotive or household cleaners.
Stains on vinyl should be cleaned with warm soapy
water first. If alcohol based cleaner is used, caution 4
must be exercised.
If alcohol based cleaners are used, on either cloth or BD05C062 Figure 22
vinyl, it is recommended to test a small area, first. 3. ARMREST PAD (ONE EACH SIDE
4. ARMREST PAD SCREW
Lubricate the seat slides.
The arm rest pads may be replaced, if necessary.
Use compressed air, to keep the seat bearing area
clear of debris, and dirt. Loosen the phillips screw at the front, underside of
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . graphite grease the armrest and replace. (The rear of the pad snaps
into position).
WARNING: Always wear approved eye
! protection when using compressed air.
Figure 20
IMPORTANT: Do not lubricate the bearing area. Use
compressed air only, to clear dirt and debris.

1 1

BD05E097 Figure 23
Tip the backrest fully forward and lubricate the tilt
mechanism on each side with graphite grease.

2
BD05D015 Figure 21
1. SEAT SLIDES SHOWN FROM REAR
2. BEARING AREA

6-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Type of Fire Extinguisher
It is recommended that you have a fire extinguisher
on your machine. The fire extinguisher shown below
is available from your Case dealer and can be
installed on the machine.

BD00F064 Figure 24
This dr y chemical fire extinguisher (Case par t
number 549974C91) has a 5 pound capacity and is
approved for class A, B, and C type fires. The
operating temperature is from −65° to 120° F (−54° to
49° C).
Fire Extinguisher Care
Every Month: It is recommended that you inspect
the fire extinguisher once each month for damage
and to insure that the gauge is working correctly.
O n c e E a c h Ye a r : H a ve t h e f i r e e q u i p m e n t
r e p r e s e n ta t i ve i n s p e c t t h e f i r e ext i n g u i s h e r.
Reference NFPA Standard No. 10-1992.
Every 6 Years: Have the dry chemical removed and
refilled by a fire equipment representative. Reference
NFPA Standard No. 10-1992
Once Every 12 Years: Have the fire equipment
r e p r e s e n t a t i ve hy d r o s t a t i c a l l y t e s t t h e f i r e
ext i n g ui s h e r. R e fe re n c e N F PA S t a n da r d N o.
10-1992.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 6-11

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

WELDING ON THE MACHINE

Before welding on the machine you must do the
following. If you have any questions about welding on
the machine contact your Dealer.
• Disconnect the batteries.
• Disconnect the alternator terminal wires.
• Disconnect the instrument cluster.
• one connection for mechanical fuel injection
engines
• two connections for HPCR - (high pressure
common rail engines).

BD08A525 Figure 25
• Disconnect the electronic diesel controller, if
equipped. three connections.
• Disconnect the hydraulic dipper and stabilizer
control, if equipped. one connection.
• Disconnect the powershift transmission controller,
if equipped. one connector. Located under the
front steering cowling.
• Disconnect the electro hydraulic loader control, if
equipped. one connector. Under the left side of the
machine, under the loader valve. Under the rear of
the machine.

6-12 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

4 IN 1 BUCKET CONTROL SWITCH DETENT

ENABLE PROCEDURE
The operator or service technician may enable a
detent position into the 4 IN 1 cycle by adjusting the
switch, as it comes from the manufacturer.
This position will alter the cycle to allow the operator 3
to touch the switch into holding the open circuit and
holding until the operator pulls the switch out.

BD08B445 Figure 28
3. PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW
2. With a small phillips head screwdriver remove
the screw that holds the switch.

BD08B443 Figure 26
1. 4 IN 1 SWITCH LOCATED IN THE LOADER CONTROL
LEVER
The graphic above shows the switch as delivered
from the manufacturer. Notice the open U shape is
UP. In this configuration, the switch will spring back to
neutral when released, from any position.
To place a detent position into bucket OPEN you will
be removing the top of the switch and rotating it 180
degrees:

BD08B446 Figure 29
2 3. Lift the top of the switch off, rotate 180 degrees
and star t the screw back into the top of the
switch, as shown.
NOTE: The open U shape should be to the bottom,
as shown in figure 29.

BD08B443 Figure 27
2. CAP
1. Use a very small screwdriver and pry the cap off
of the switch top.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 6-13

 CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

5
4

BD08B447 Figure 32
5. CAP
BD08B447 Figure 30 6. Replace the cap that covers the phillips head
4. PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW screw.
4. Carefully replace the screw and do not
overtighten. The 4 in 1 bucket control switch detent is now
activated.
7. Take the machine to an open, safe area, and test
C
the switch by moving it through the entire range
of motion in both directions.

BD08B449 Figure 31
SWITCH IN DETENT HOLD OPEN POSITION
5. Test the switch by placing it up into the detent
position before replacing the cap. The switch
should hold into the detent position, as shown.
The operator must pull the switch out of the
position shown.

BS07N606 Figure 33

6-14 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

Chapter 7
ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS

BATTERIES AND BATTERY SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

BATTERY FLUID LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
BATTERY VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
STOP, TAIL, FLASHER AND TURN SIGNAL BULBS - CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
FLASHER AND TURN SIGNAL - CANOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
DOME LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
DRIVING AND FLOOD LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 580M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
FUSES, OUTLETS AND RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
ACCESSORY OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 7-1

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

7-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

ELECTRICAL
BATTERIES AND BATTERY SAFETY

WARNING: Before you service a battery, always wear face protection, protective gloves, and protective
! clothing. Battery acid or battery explosion can cause serious injuries.
SA046 Figure 1

WARNING: Battery acid causes severe burns. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes
or clothing. Antidote: EXTERNAL - Flush with water. INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or milk.
DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE
! GASES. Keep sparks, flame, cigars and cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed
area. Always wear eye protection when working near batteries. Wash hands after handling. KEEP OUT OF
REACH OF CHILDREN.
M144B Figure 2

WARNING: When the battery electrolyte is frozen, the battery can explode if, (1) you try to charge the
battery, or (2) you try to jump start and run the engine. To prevent the battery electrolyte from freezing, try
! to keep the battery at full charge. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others in the area can be
injured.
SA033 Figure 3

WARNING: Sparks or flame can cause hydrogen gas in a battery to explode. To prevent an explosion, do
the following:
1. When you disconnect the battery cables, always disconnect the negative (−) battery cable first.
! 2. When you connect the battery cables, always connect the negative (−) battery cable last.
3. Do not short circuit the battery posts with metal items.
4. Do not weld, grind, or smoke near a battery.
SA034 Figure 4
NOTE: The electrical system in this machine is 12 volt.
Before you service components of the electrical system, always disconnect the negative (-) battery cables.
Do not run the engine with the battery cables disconnected or with the alternators wires disconnected.
Before using an electric welder, disconnect the alternator wires, instrument cluster, and battery(ies).
Do not use a steam cleaner or cleaning solvent to clean the alternator.
BATTERY FLUID LEVEL
Check the fluid level of the batteries every 1000
2 hours of operation. If the fluid level is low, add clean
2 or distilled water to each cell. Fill to within 6 inches of
the top. See the instructions on the battery.
IMPORTANT: If the temperature is 32° F (0° C) or
below and you have added water to the batteries, do
the following: Connect a battery charger to the
batteries or run the engine for approximately two
hours. This procedure is necessary to mix the water
1 1 with the electrolyte.
BATTERY VENTS
BD08A453 Figure 5 Keep the battery vents clean. Make sure the vents
1. POSITIVE (+) TERMIINALS are not restricted.
2. NEGATIVE (-) TERMINAL
3. NEGATIVE (-) TERMINAL AND GROUND

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 7-3

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

BULB REPLACEMENT
STOP, TAIL, FLASHER AND TURN SIGNAL
BULBS - CAB

BD00J033 Figure 10
BD00J036 Figure 6 5. Replace the bulb.
1. Remove the lens. Flasher and Turn Signal Bulb
Stop and Tail Lamps FLASHER AND TURN SIGNAL - CANOPY

1
BD00J039 Figure 7
2. Remove the socket from the lens.

BC00J08 Figure 11
1. LENS
2. BULB
1. Remove the lens and replace the bulb.
DOME LAMP
BD00J039 Figure 8
3. Replace the bulb.
Stop and Tail Lamp
Flasher and Turn Signal

BD00F053 Figure 12
1. LENS
BD00J041 Figure 9 1. Remove the lens and replace bulb.
4. Remove the socket from the lens.
7-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA
 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

DRIVING AND FLOOD LAMPS

2
1

2 2

2 2

1
2

B9412114T Figure 13
1. DRIVING LAMP BULB
2. FLOOD LAMP BULB

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the lamp from the cab for bulb replacement.

BD00L024 Figure 14 BD00J026 Figure 16

1. Remove the two screws. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector for the bulb
assembly.

BD00J025 Figure 15
2. Remove the lens from the lamp. BD00J027 Figure 17
4. Compress the wire spring holder for the bulb
assembly.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 7-5

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

BD00J028 Figure 18
5. Move the wire spring holder and remove and
discard the bulb assembly.

BD00J026 Figure 19
6. Make sure the gasket is in place on the lens.
VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT OF DRIVING AND
WORK LAMPS: The cross bolt in the lamp mounting
bracket must be loosened before the lamp is moved.
Moving the lamp without loosening the cross bolt can
cause damage to the plastic housing, allowing the
lamp to fall out of position.

7-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 580M

Warning lamp and instrument lamp replacement bulb assembly ............................................................... 388053A2
NOTE: Use only Case part specified for bulb assembly replacement, any other bulbs used could damage the
instrument cluster.

1 1
1
1
1

3 2 2 3
BS00F083 Figure 20
1. WARNING LAMPS
2. BACK LIGHT LAMPS
3. MOUNTING SCREWS (2)

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable(s).

2. Remove the two screws that fasten the instrument cluster in the console. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the rear of the instrument cluster and remove the instrument cluster.

BD00H152 Figure 21
3. Remove the two screws that fasten the rear cover to the frame.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 7-7

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

BD00H151 Figure 22
4. Remove the rear cover from the frame.
5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise to remove. The bulb and bulb holder are service together, replace the
bulb assembly.

BD00H150 Figure 23
NOTE: Make sure the O-ring is in position on the rear cover when the rear cover is installed.

7-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

FUSES, OUTLETS AND RELAYS

FUSES

1 5

BD00G064 Figure 26
5. FUSE LOCATION DECAL INSIDE COVER
BD00G065 Figure 24 ACCESSORY OUTLETS
1. FUSE COVER
2. SCREW
Remove the screw to access the fuses.

4
3

BD00F023 Figure 27
Two 12 volt accessory outlest are locate just to the
right of the instrument cluster.

BD08B480 Figure 25
3. FUSES
4. SERVICE TOOL PORT

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 7-9

 CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

RELAYS
Use an acceptable tool and remove the access
cover.

BD00G071 Figure 28
Relays are under the cover on the left and right.

BS06K462 Figure 29
RELAY DECAL

7-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Chapter 8
SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

580M SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Engine - Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
580m Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
580m Series 3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
580m Series 3 Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Lift Capacities - 580M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
580 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/ BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Engine, Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
580 Super M Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
580 Super M Series 3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
580 Super M Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Lift Capacities 580 Super M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
580 SUPER M + SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Engine, Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Powershift Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
580 Super M + Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
580 Super M + Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Lift Capacities 580 Super M + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
590 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Engine, Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
590 Super M Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
590 Super M and Super M + Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
590 Super M Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Lift Capacities 590 Super M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
590 SUPER M+ SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Engine, Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Powershift Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
590 Super M + Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Loader And Backhoe Buckets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Material Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA 8-1

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

8-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

580M SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE - TIER III CERTIFIED
Model........................................................................................................................................ Case 445T/M3 Diesel
Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged
Bore and stroke ......................................................................................................... 4.09 x 5.19 in (104 x 132 mm)
Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L)
Fuel Injection .................................................................................................................................. Direct Mechanical
Horsepower - rated
SAE net ....................................................................................................................... 79 hp (59 kW) @2200 rpm
SAE gross ................................................................................................................... 84 hp (63 kW) @2200 rpm
Maximum Torque
Net.............................................................................................................. 271 pound feet (367 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Gross......................................................................................................... 276 pound feet (374 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................23%
Engine speeds:
Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm
Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................875 - 1025
High idle, no load..................................................................................................................................2300 - 2450
Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2180 - 2310
Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2230 - 2330
Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2230 - 2330
Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................1610 - 1890

POWERTRAIN
Transmission
4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch disconnect
buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios Forward Reverse

1st 5.603 4.643
2nd 3.481 2.884
3rd 1.584 1.313
4th 0.793 0.657
Figure 1
Torque Converter Ratio ......................................................................................................................................3.223
Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation
Front Axle
Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.0
Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.0
Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................12.0
Rear Axle
Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.5
Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.4
Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................16.0
Brakes
Service brakes: Individually applied, power assisted, hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting,
outboard mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.
Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-3

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580M Series 3 Specifications continued -

TRAVEL SPEEDS

17.5L x 24 rear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

tires mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.5 (5.7) 5.7 (9.1) 12.1 (19.5) 22.8 (36.6)
Reverse 4.2 (6.8) 6.8 (11.0) 14.5 (23.4) 27.3 (43.9)
NOTE: Engine @ 2293 rpm.

Figure 2

19.5L x 24 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

rear tires mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.8 (6.1) 6.1 (9.8) 12.9 (20.8) 24.3 (39.1)
Reverse 4.5 (7.3) 7.3 (11.7) 15.5 (24.9) 29.1 (46.9)
NOTE: Engine @ 2293 rpm

Figure 3
FRONT TIRES
2WD..................................................................................................................................... 11L x 16.1 (10-ply rating)
4WD......................................................................................................................................... 12 x 16.5 (8-ply rating)
REAR TIRES
2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 17.5L x 24 (10-ply rating)
2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 19.5L x 24 (10-ply rating)

HYDRAULICS
Pump ................................................................................ Gear-type, transmission driven coupled directly to engine
Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line
Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty
Loader flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................28.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (108 L/min @ 210 bar)
Loader Control Valve:
Monoblock single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.
Loader Control Handle:
Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.
Loader auxiliary hydraulics with full available flow.......................................................0 to 28.5 gpm (0 to 108 L/min)
Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm ........................................................28.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (108L/min @ 210 bar)
Manual Backhoe Controls:
Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits
Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.
Pilot Backhoe Controls:
Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional
closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics:
Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable from ..................................................................... 0 to 28.5 gpm (108L/min)
Control operation:
Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated
Pilot ....................................................................................................................................button on left joystick
Bi-directional flow, variable from ...................................................... 0 to 28.5 gpm (108 L/min) @ rated engine rpm.

8-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580M Series 3 Specifications continued -

580M OPERATING WEIGHTS

Lightest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
2WD, ROPS canopy, non suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm)
universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 17.5L x 24 rear tires, 11L x 16.1 front tires, single battery, standard
cast stabilizer pads, and ne operator......................................................................................... 13 359 lbs (6060 kg).
Heaviest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
4WD, ROPS cab, suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe
bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 19.5L x 24 rear tires, 12L x 16.5 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads and
no operator ................................................................................................................................ 16 510 lbs (7489 kg).

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-5

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 4

A. Overall operating height - fully raised:

General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................13 ft 8 in (4.17 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m)
B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.4 m)
C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................12.7 in (323 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.6 in (372 mm)
D. Dump angle @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket................................................................................................................... 46 degrees
4 IN 1 Bucket .................................................................................................................................... 45 degrees
E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket...........................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.72 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ..........................................................................................................9 ft 8 in (2.95 m)
F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................28.2 in (717 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................27.7 in (704 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open .........................................................................................................14.2 in (360 mm)
NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket
without bolt-on cutting edge.

8-6 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 5

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline:

General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................40 degrees
H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................45 degrees
J. Bucket rollback @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ..................................................................................................... adjustable
K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................7.8 in (199 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................7.1 in (180 mm)
Clam open (dozing)....................................................................................................................4.4 in (111 mm)
L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................77.6 in (1.91 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................75.2 in (1.85 m)
M. Overall transport length:
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ......................................................................23 ft 2 in (7.07 m)
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / 4 In 1 Bucket ..................................................................23 ft 1 in (7.05 m)
Overall transport width:
Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m)
Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m)
NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket
without bolt-on cutting edge.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-7

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 6

N. Transport height:
Standard Backhoe ..................................................................................................................11 ft 3 in (3.42 m)
Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 7 in (3.53 m)
Height to:
Top of canopy............................................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m)
Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.72 m)
Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame14.8 in (376 mm)
O. Wheelbase
2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m)
4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m)
Width across tires
17.5L x 24 ................................................................................................................................81.7 in (2.074 m)
19.5L x 24 ................................................................................................................................81.4 in (2.067 m)
NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket
without bolt-on cutting edge.

8-8 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580M SERIES 3 OPERATIONAL DATA

Standard Backhoe
Digging depth:
Maximum.....................................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 2 in (4.32 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom ...............................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................21 ft 5 in (6.53 m)
Swing pivot ................................................................................................................................17 ft 10 in (5.44 m)
Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.40 m)
Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m)
Extendahoe
Digging depth:
Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m)
Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 3 in (5.56 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 8 in (4.47 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended .............................................................................................18 ft 2 in (5.54 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (4.19 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................17 ft 6 in (5.33 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................22 ft 0 in (6.70 m)
Rear axle centerline extended.....................................................................................................25 ft 5 in (7.75 m)
Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................18 ft 5 in (5.61 m)
Swing pivot extended ................................................................................................................21 ft 10 in (6.65 m)
Loading height
retracted ......................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m)
extended......................................................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m)
Loading reach
retracted ........................................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m)
extended......................................................................................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.50 m)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-9

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES - 580M

Standard Backhoe
Boom Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.52 m) 1 950 lbs (885 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 9 in (3.28 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 12 ft 7 in (3.84 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 13 ft 6 in (4.11 m) 2 750 lbs (1247 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 730 lbs (1238 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 14 ft 9 in (4.50 m) 2 720 lbs (1234 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 2 680 lbs (1216 kg)
Ground Level 14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 2 490 lbs (1129 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 14 ft 3 in (4.35 m) 2 440 lbs (1107 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 440 lbs (1107 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 12 ft 0 in (3.66 m) 2 440 lbs (1107 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 2 500 lbs (1134 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 7 ft 0 in (2.13 m) 2 780 lbs (1261 kg)
Dipper Lift
+12 ft (3.66 m) 9 ft 9 in (2.97 m) 3 950 lbs (1792 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 10 ft 4 in (3.15 m) 3 690 lbs (1674 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 3 750 lbs (1701 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 9 ft 4 in (2.84 m) 4 100 lbs (1860 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 7 ft 6 in (2.29 m) 4 710 lbs (2136 kg)

Figure 7
NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose
trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each
weight.

Extendahoe Retracted
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 9 ft 6 in (2.89 m) 1 280 lbs (581 kg)

+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 1 940 lbs (880 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 5 in (4.09 m) 2 200 lbs (998 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 2 220 lbs (1007 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 15 ft 3 in (4.65 m) 2 260 lbs (1025 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 10 in (4.82 m) 2 290 lbs (1039 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 16 ft 0 in (4.88 m) 2 290 lbs (1039 kg)
Ground Level 15 ft 11 in (4.85 m) 2 270 lbs (1030 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 2 260 lbs (1025 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) 2 240 lbs (1016 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 13 ft 10 in (4.21 m) 2 270 lbs (1030 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 12 ft 6 in (3.81 m) 2 350 lbs (1066 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 10 ft 4 in (3.15 m) 2 350 lbs (1066 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 8 in (3.25 m) 3 430 lbs (1556 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 11 ft 1 in (3.38 m) 3 170 lbs (1438 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 11 ft 0 in (3.35 m) 3 240 lbs (1470 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 3 610 lbs (1637 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 8 ft 2 in (2.49 m) 4 290 lbs (1946 kg)

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose
trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each
weight.

8-10 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES - 580M CONTINUED -

Extendahoe Extended
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 16 ft (4.87 m) 12 ft 7 in (3.84 m) 810 lbs (367 kg)

+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 1 400 lbs (635 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 16 ft 2 in (4.93 m) 1 430 lbs (649 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 17 ft 3 in (5.26 m) 1 540 lbs (699 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 18 ft 1 in (5.52 m) 1 610 lbs (730 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 18 ft 8 in (5.69 m) 1 620 lbs (735 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 19 ft 0 in (5.79 m) 1 660 lbs (753 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 19 ft 1 in (5.82 m) 1 700 lbs (771 kg)
Ground Level 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 1 730 lbs (785 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 18 ft 6 in (5.64 m) 1 720 lbs (780 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 17 ft 10 in (5.43 m) 1 730 lbs (785 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 17 ft 0 in (5.18 m) 1 740 lbs (789 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 15 ft 9 in (4.80 m) 1 780 lbs (807 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 14 ft 1 in (4.30 m) 1 870 lbs (848 kg)
- 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 9 in (3.58 m) 2 040 lbs (925 kg)
- 14 ft (4.27 m) 8 ft 1 in (2.47 m) 2 610 lbs (1184 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 (4.27 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 120 lbs (962 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 2 210 lbs (1002 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m) 2 200 lbs (998 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 160 lbs (980 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 13 ft 10 in (4.21 m) 2 230 lbs (1012 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg)

Figure 8

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose
trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each
weight.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-11

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/ BACKHOE

ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED
Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR)
Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged
Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm)
Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L)
Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR
Horsepower - rated
SAE net ........................................................................................................................ 90 hp (67 kW) @2200 rpm
SAE gross .................................................................................................................. 97 hp (72 kW) @2200 rpm
Maximum Torque
Net.............................................................................................................. 326 pound feet (442 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Gross.......................................................................................................... 334 pound feet (453 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45%
Engine speeds:
Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm
Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000
High idle, no load .................................................................................................................................2330 - 2430
Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2080 - 2260
Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2160 - 2300
Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2240 - 2335
Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................1695 - 1930

POWERTRAIN
Transmissions
Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch
disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever

Gear Ratios Forward Reverse

1st 5.603 4.643
2nd 3.481 2.884
3rd 1.584 1.313
4th 0.793 0.657
Figure 9
Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................ 2.64
Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation
Front Axle
Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.0
Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.0
Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 12.0
Rear Axle
Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.5
Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.4
Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 16.0
Brakes
Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard
mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.

Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

8-12 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued -

POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS

17.5L x 24 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

rear tires mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.5 (5.7) 5.7 (9.1) 12.1 (19.4) 22.7 (36.5)
Reverse 4.2 (6.8) 6.8 (10.9) 14.5 (23.3) 27.2 (43.8)
NOTE: Engine @ 2348 rpm.

Figure 10

19.5L x 24 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

rear tires mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.8 (6.0) 6.0 (9.7) 12.9 (20.7) 24.2 (39.0)
Reverse 4.5 (7.3) 7.2 (11.7) 15.4 (24.8) 29.0 (46.7)
NOTE: Engine @ 2348 rpm.

Figure 11
Powershift Travel Speeds

17.5L x 24 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

rear tires mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.6 (5.7) 5.8 (9.4) 12.5 (20.1) 22.2 (35.8)
Reverse 4.3 (6.9) 7.0 (11.2) 15.0 (24.1)
NOTE: Engine @ 2287 rpm.

Figure 12

19.5L x 24 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

rear tires mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.8 (6.1) 6.3 (10.1) 13.3 (21.4) 23.7 (38.1)
Reverse 4.6 (7.3) 7.5 (12.1) 16.0 (25.7)
NOTE: Engine @ 2287 rpm.

Figure 13

FRONT TIRES
2WD..................................................................................................................................... 11L x 16.1 (10-ply rating)
4WD......................................................................................................................................... 12 x 16.5 (8-ply rating)
REAR TIRES
2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 17.5L x 24 (10-ply rating)
2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 19.5L x 24 (10-ply rating)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-13

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued -

HYDRAULICS
Pump .................................................................. Tandem Gear-type, transmission driven coupled directly to engine
Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line
Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty
Loader flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................28.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (108 L/min @ 210 bar)
Loader Control Valve:
Monoblock single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.
Loader Control Handle:
Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.
Loader auxiliary hydraulics with full available flow.......................................................0 to 28.5 gpm (0 to 108 L/min)
Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm ...........................................................38 gpm @ 3050 psi (144L/min @ 210 bar)
Manual Backhoe Controls:
Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits
Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.
Pilot Backhoe Controls:
Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional
closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics:
Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable from ....................................................................0 to 28.5 gpm (108 L/min)
Control operation:
Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated
Pilot ....................................................................................................................................button on left joystick
Bi-directional flow, variable from ......................................................... 0 to 38 gpm (144 L/min) @ rated engine rpm.

580 SUPER M OPERATING WEIGHTS

Lightest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
2WD, ROPS canopy, non suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm)
universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 17.5L x 24 rear tires, 11L x 16.1 front tires, single battery, standard
cast stabilizer pads, and ne operator......................................................................................... 14 285 lbs (6480 kg).
Heaviest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
4WD, ROPS cab, suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe
bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 19.5L x 24 rear tires, 12L x 16.5 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads and
no operator ................................................................................................................................. 17 545 lbs (7958 kg)

8-14 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 14
A. Overall operating height - fully raised:
General Purpose Bucket.......................................................................................................13 ft 11 in (4.25 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m)
B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.4 m)
C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................13.1 in (334 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.6 in (372 mm)
D. Dump angle @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket...................................................................................................................45 degrees
4 IN 1 Bucket ....................................................................................................................................45 degrees
E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................8 ft 10 in (2.69 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.72 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ..........................................................................................................9 ft 8 in (2.95 m)
F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................30.0 in (763 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................27.8 in (707 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ..........................................................................................................14.2 in (360 mm
NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket
without bolt-on cutting edge.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-15

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 15
G. Bucket rollback @ groundline:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 40 degrees
H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 45 degrees
J. Bucket rollback @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ......................................................................................................adjustable
K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................5.9 in (149 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................6.8 in (180 mm)
Clam open (dozing)....................................................................................................................4.1 in (103 mm)
L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................77.6 in (1.97 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................75.2 in (1.91 m)
M. Overall transport length:
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ....................................................................22 ft 10 in (6.95 m)
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / 4 In 1 Bucket ..................................................................22 ft 8 in (6.92 m)
Overall transport width:
Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m)
Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame ........................................................................................ 376 mm (14.8 inches)

8-16 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 16

N. Transport height:
Standard Backhoe ................................................................................................................10 ft 10 in (3.29 m)
Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 3 in (3.42 m)
Height to:
Top of canopy............................................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m)
Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 10 in (2.69 m)
Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 6 in (2.59 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame ................................................................................................14.6 in (371 mm)
O. Wheelbase
2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m)
4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m)
Width across tires:
17.5L x 24 ................................................................................................................................81.7 in (2.075 m)
19.5L x 24 ............................................................................................................................... 81.4 in (2.067 m)
NOTE: Dimensions taken with 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 11L x 16 front tires except that data marked 4WD is taken
with 12 x 16.5 front tires.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-17

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M OPERATIONAL DATA

Standard Backhoe
Digging depth:
Maximum.....................................................................................................................................14 ft 5 in (4.39 m)
Maximum w/hi-capacity bucket..................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom ...............................................................................................................13 ft 4 in (4.06 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................21 ft 5 in (6.53 m)
Swing pivot ..................................................................................................................................18 ft 1 in (5.51 m)
Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.40 m)
Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m)
Extendahoe
Digging depth:
Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m)
Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 3 in (5.56 m)
With hi-capacity bucket:
Maximum retracted......................................................................................................................15 ft 3 in (4.65 m)
Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 8 in (5.69 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 8 in (4.47 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended .............................................................................................18 ft 2 in (5.54 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (4.19 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................17 ft 6 in (5.33 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................22 ft 0 in (6.70 m)
Rear axle centerline extended ....................................................................................................25 ft 5 in (7.75 m)
Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................18 ft 5 in (5.61 m)
Swing pivot extended ................................................................................................................21 ft 10 in (6.65 m)
Loading height
Retracted.....................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m)
Extended .....................................................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m)
Loading reach
Retracted.......................................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m)
Extended .....................................................................................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.50 m)

8-18 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M

Standard Backhoe
Boom Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 2 750 lbs (1247 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.84 m) 3 100 lbs (1406 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 3 000 lbs (1361 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 2 900 lbs (1315 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 1 in (4.60 m) 2 850 lbs (1293 kg)
Ground Level 14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 2 775 lbs (1259 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 675 lbs (1213 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 13 ft 7 in (4.14 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 12 ft 4 in (3.76 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 5 in (3.18 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 7 ft 6 in (2.28 m) 2 825 lbs (1281 kg)
Dipper Lift
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 1 in (3.08 m) 4 940 lbs (2241 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 4 650 lbs (2109 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 6 in (3.20 m) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 9 ft 7 in (2.92 m) 5 290 lbs (2400 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 7 ft 5 in (2.25 m) 6 610 lbs (2998 kg)

Figure 17
NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) Universal H.D. trenching
bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

Extendahoe Retracted
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 9 ft 6 in (2.89 m) 2 350 lbs (1066 kg)

+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 650 lbs (1202 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 15 ft 2 in (4.62 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 6 in (4.72 m) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 2 525 lbs (1145 kg)
Ground Level 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 2 425 lbs (1100 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 2 400 lbs (1088 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 2 425 lbs (1099 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 4 360lbs (1978 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 4 190lbs (1901 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 11 in (3.33 m) 4 160 lbs (1887 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.58 m) 5 590 lbs (2536 kg)

Figure 18

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose
trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each
weight.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-19

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M

Extendahoe Extended
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 16 ft (4.87 m) 12 ft 5 in (3.79 m) 1 350 lbs (612 kg)

+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 1 775 lbs (805 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 16 ft 2 in (4.93 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 17 ft 2 in (5.23 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 18 ft 0 in (5.49 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 18 ft 7 in (5.67 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 18 ft 11 in (5.77 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
Ground Level 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 18 ft 5 in (5.62 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 17 ft 9 in (5.41 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 16 ft 9 in (5.11 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
- 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 7 in (3.53 m) 2 025 lbs (918 kg)
- 14 ft (4.27 m) 7 ft 11 in (2.41 m) 2 450 lbs (1111 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 (4.27 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 580 lbs (1170 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 14 ft 3 in (4.35 m) 2 680 lbs (1216 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 880 lbs (1306 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 2 910 lbs (1320 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 12 ft 11 in (3.94 m) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)

Figure 19

8-20 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M + SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE

ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED
Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR)
Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged
Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm)
Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L)
Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR
Horsepower - rated
SAE net ........................................................................................................................ 95 hp (71 kW) @2200 rpm
SAE gross .................................................................................................................. 97 hp (72 kW) @2200 rpm
Maximum Torque
Net.............................................................................................................. 333 pound feet (452 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Gross.......................................................................................................... 334 pound feet (453 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45%
Engine speeds:
Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm
Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000
High idle, no load..................................................................................................................................2330 - 2430
Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2150 - 2295
Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2330 - 2420
Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2330 - 2420
Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................2090 - 2270

POWERTRAIN
Transmissions
Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch
disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios Forward Reverse

1st 5.603 4.643
2nd 3.431 2.884
3rd 1.584 1.313
4th 0.793 0.657
Figure 20
Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................2.64
Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation
Front Axle
Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.0
Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.0
Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................12.0
Rear Axle
Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.5
Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.4
Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................16.0
Brakes
Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard
mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.
Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-21

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 Super M + Specifications continued -

POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS

1st 2nd 3rd 4th

21L x 24 rear tires
mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 4.0 (6.4) 6.3 (10.1) 13.5 (21.8) 25.4 (40.9)
Reverse 4.7 (7.7) 7.5 (12.5) 16.2 (27.0) 30.5 (49.0)
NOTE: Engine @ 2310 rpm.

Figure 21

POWERSHIFT TRAVEL SPEEDS

1st 2nd 3rd 4th

21L x 24 rear tires
mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 4.0 (6.4) 6.5 (10.4) 14.0 (22.5) 24.9 (40.1)
Reverse 4.8 (7.7) 7.8 (12.5) 16.8 (27.0)
NOTE: Engine @ 2320 rpm.

Figure 22

FRONT TIRES
2WD............................................................................................................................... 14.5/75 x 16.1 (10-ply rating)
4WD................................................................................................................................. 12.5/80 x 16.5 (8-ply rating)
REAR TIRES
2/4WD..................................................................................................................................... 21L x 24 (10-ply rating)

8-22 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 Super M + Specifications continued -

HYDRAULICS
Pump .....................................Variable displacement axial piston, transmission mounted, coupled directly to engine
Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line
Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty
Loader flow @ rated engine rpm
Combined functions .........................................................................40.0 gpm @ 3100 psi (151 L/min @ 214 bar)
Individual functions...........................................................................31.5 gpm @ 3100 psi (119 L/min @ 214 bar)
Minimum flow .................................................................................................................... 4.0 gpm @ rated speed
Loader Control Valve:
Pressure compensated loader hydraulics for simultaneous lift and bucket operation. Sectional valve, single lever
control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.
Loader Control Handle:
Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.
Loader auxiliary hydraulics with full available flow.......................................................0 to 31.5 gpm (0 to 119 L/min)
Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................40 gpm @ 3100 psi (151 L/min @ 214 bar)
Manual Backhoe Controls:
Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits
Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.
Pilot Backhoe Controls:
Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional
closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics:
Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable flow from .............................................................0 to 36.0 gpm (136 L/min)
Control operation:
Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated
Pilot ................................................................................................................................... button on left joystick
Bi-directional flow, variable from ....................................................... 0 to 38.0 gpm (144 L/min) @ rated engine rpm

580 SUPER M + OPERATING WEIGHTS

Lightest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
4WD, ROPS canopy, vinyl air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm)
universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 12.5 x 80/18 front tires, dual batteries, flip
over stabilizer pads, 900 lb. counterweight and no operator ..................................................... 14 905 lbs (6761 kg).
Heaviest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
4WD, ROPS 2 door cab, suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal
backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 12.5 x 80/18 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer
pads, 900 lb. counterweight and no operator ............................................................................. 18 128 lbs (8223 kg)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-23

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 23

A. Overall operating height - fully raised:

General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................14 ft 4 in (4.36 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m)
B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ..............................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.51 m)
C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................13.1 in (334 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.6 in (372 mm)
D. Dump angle @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket................................................................................................................... 45 degrees
4 IN 1 Bucket .................................................................................................................................... 45 degrees
E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket...........................................................................................................9 ft 2 in (2.80 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ............................................................................................................................9 ft 3 in (2.83 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ........................................................................................................10 ft 0 in (3.06 m)
F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................30.0 in (763 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................27.8 in (707 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open .........................................................................................................14.3 in (362 mm)
NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 21L x 24 rear tires and 93 in (2.36 m) general purpose bucket without
bolt-on cutting edge.

8-24 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 24

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline:

General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................40 degrees
H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................45 degrees
J. Bucket rollback @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ..................................................................................................... adjustable
K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat:
General Purpose Bucket..............................................................................................................3.1 in (78 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................4.1 in (106 mm)
Clam open (dozing)......................................................................................................................3.0 in (77 mm)
L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................75.5 in (1.92 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................73.7 in (1.87 m)
M. Overall transport length:
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ....................................................................22 ft 10 in (6.95 m)
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / 4 In 1 Bucket ..................................................................22 ft 8 in (6.92 m)
Overall transport width:
Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m)
Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame........................................................................................14.5 in (366 mm)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-25

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 25
N. Transport height:
Standard Backhoe ................................................................................................................10 ft 11 in (3.32 m)
Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 4 in (3.44 m)
Height to:
Top of canopy..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.71 m)
Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.73 m)
Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.66 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame ................................................................................................14.5 in (366 mm)
O. Wheelbase:
2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m)
4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m)
Width across front tires:
2WD ...........................................................................................................................................88.3 in (2.24 m)
4WD .......................................................................................................................................... 89.6 in (2.28 m)
Width across rear tires:
All M +........................................................................................................................................91.8 in (2.33 m)
NOTE: Dimensions taken with 21L x rear tires and 12.5 / 80 x 18 front tires except that data marked 2WD is taken
with 14.5 / 75 x 16.1.

8-26 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M + OPERATIONAL DATA

Standard Backhoe
Digging depth:
Maximum.....................................................................................................................................14 ft 5 in (4.39 m)
Maximum w/hi-capacity bucket..................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom ...............................................................................................................13 ft 4 in (4.06 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................21 ft 5 in (6.53 m)
Swing pivot ..................................................................................................................................18 ft 1 in (5.51 m)
Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.40 m)
Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m)
Extendahoe
Digging depth:
Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m)
Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 3 in (5.56 m)
With hi-capacity bucket:
Maximum retracted......................................................................................................................15 ft 3 in (4.65 m)
Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 8 in (5.69 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 8 in (4.47 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended .............................................................................................18 ft 2 in (5.54 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (4.19 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................17 ft 6 in (5.33 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................22 ft 0 in (6.70 m)
Rear axle centerline extended.....................................................................................................25 ft 5 in (7.75 m)
Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................18 ft 5 in (5.61 m)
Swing pivot extended ................................................................................................................21 ft 10 in (6.65 m)
Loading height
Retracted.....................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m)
Extended .....................................................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m)
Loading reach
Retracted.......................................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m)
Extended .....................................................................................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.50 m)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-27

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M +

Standard Backhoe
Boom Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 2 750 lbs (1247 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.84 m) 3 100 lbs (1406 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 3 000 lbs (1361 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 2 900 lbs (1315 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 1 in (4.60 m) 2 850 lbs (1293 kg)
Ground Level 14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 2 775 lbs (1259 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 675 lbs (1213 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 13 ft 7 in (4.14 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 12 ft 4 in (3.76 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 5 in (3.18 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 7 ft 6 in (2.28 m) 2 825 lbs (1281 kg)
Dipper Lift
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 1 in (3.08 m) 4 940 lbs (2241 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 4 650 lbs (2109 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 6 in (3.20 m) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 9 ft 7 in (2.92 m) 5 290 lbs (2400 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 7 ft 5 in (2.25 m) 6 610 lbs (2998 kg)

Figure 26
NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) Universal H.D.
trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

Extendahoe Retracted
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 9 ft 6 in (2.89 m) 2 350 lbs (1066 kg)

+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 650 lbs (1202 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 15 ft 2 in (4.62 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 6 in (4.72 m) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 2 525 lbs (1145 kg)
Ground Level 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 2 425 lbs (1100 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 2 400 lbs (1088 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 2 425 lbs (1099 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 4 360lbs (1978 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 4 190lbs (1901 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 11 in (3.33 m) 4 160 lbs (1887 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.58 m) 5 590 lbs (2536 kg)

Figure 27

Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) Universal H.D. trenching
bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

8-28 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M + CONTINUED -

Extendahoe Extended
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 16 ft (4.87 m) 12 ft 5 in (3.79 m) 1 350 lbs (612 kg)

+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 1 775 lbs (805 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 16 ft 2 in (4.93 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 17 ft 2 in (5.23 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 18 ft 0 in (5.49 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 18 ft 7 in (5.67 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 1 875 lbs (850 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 18 ft 11 in (5.77 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
Ground Level 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 18 ft 5 in (5.62 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 17 ft 9 in (5.41 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 16 ft 9 in (5.11 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 1 800 lbs (816 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 1 850 lbs (839 kg)
- 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 7 in (3.53 m) 2 025 lbs (918 kg)
- 14 ft (4.27 m) 7 ft 11 in (2.41 m) 2 450 lbs (1111 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 (4.27 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 580 lbs (1170 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 14 ft 3 in (4.35 m) 2 680 lbs (1216 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 880 lbs (1306 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 2 910 lbs (1320 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 12 ft 11 in (3.94 m) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)

NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) Universal H.D.
trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-29

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE

ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED
Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR)
Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged
Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm)
Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L)
Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR
Horsepower - rated
SAE net ........................................................................................................................ 95 hp (71 kW) @2200 rpm
SAE gross .................................................................................................................. 97 hp (72 kW) @2200 rpm
Maximum Torque
Net.............................................................................................................. 333 pound feet (452 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Gross.......................................................................................................... 334 pound feet (453 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45%
Engine speeds:
Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm
Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000
High idle, no load .................................................................................................................................2320 - 2430
Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2125 - 2290
Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2190 - 2300
Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2240 - 2335
Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................1830 - 2010

POWERTRAIN
Transmissions
Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch
disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios Forward Reverse

1st 5.603 4.643
2nd 3.481 2.884
3rd 1.584 1.313
4th 0.793 0.657
Figure 28
Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................ 2.64
Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation
Front Axle
Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.0
Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.0
Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 12.0
Rear Axle
Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.5
Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.4
Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 16.0
Brakes
Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard
mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.
Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

8-30 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued -

POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS

1st 2nd 3rd 4th

21L x 24 rear tires
mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 3.9 (6.3) 6.2 (10.0) 13.4 (21.6) 24.6 (39.5)
Reverse 4.7 (7.5) 7.4 (12.0) 16.1 (25.9) 29.5 (47.4)
NOTE: Engine @ 2278 rpm.

Figure 29

FRONT TIRES
2WD............................................................................................................................... 14.5/75 x 16.1 (10-ply rating)
4WD................................................................................................................................. 12.5/80 x 16.5 (8-ply rating)
REAR TIRES
2/4WD..................................................................................................................................... 21L x 24 (10-ply rating)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-31

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued -

HYDRAULICS
Pump .............................................................. Tandem gear type, transmission mounted, coupled directly to engine
Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line
Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty
Loader flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................31.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (119 L/min @ 214 bar)
Loader Control Valve:
Pressure compensated loader hydraulics for simultaneous lift and bucket operation. Sectional valve, single lever
control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.
Loader Control Handle:
Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.
.....................................................................................................................................0 to 31.5 gpm (0 to 119 L/min)
Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm .......................................................42.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (161 L/min @ 210 bar)
Manual Backhoe Controls:
Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits
Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics:
Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable flow from .............................................................0 to 36.0 gpm (136 L/min)
Control operation:
Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated
Pilot ....................................................................................................................................button on left joystick
Bi-directional flow, variable from ....................................................... 0 to 42.5 gpm (161 L/min) @ rated engine rpm

590 SUPER M OPERATING WEIGHTS

Lightest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
2WD, ROPS canopy, vinyl air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm)
universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, single battery, flip
over stabilizer pads, and no operator ........................................................................................ 15 268 lbs (6926 kg).
Heaviest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
4WD, ROPS cab, cloth air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal
backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, dual batteries, flip
stabilizer pads, and no operator ............................................................................................. 19 578 lbs (8881 kg)

8-32 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M AND SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 30

A. Overall height - fully raised:

General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................14 ft 2 in (4.32 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 6 in (4.43 m)
B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ..............................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.47 m)
C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................13.7 in (349 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.9 in (379 mm)
D. Dump angle @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket...................................................................................................................45 degrees
4 IN 1 Bucket ....................................................................................................................................45 degrees
E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket...........................................................................................................9 ft 0 in (2.75 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket ............................................................................................................................9 ft 2 in (2.78 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ........................................................................................................9 ft 10 in (3.00 m)
F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump:
General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................27.5 in (699 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................25.9 in (659 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open .........................................................................................................11.5 in (293 mm)
NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-33

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M AND SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 31

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline:

General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 40 degrees
H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 45 degrees
J. Bucket rollback @ full height:
General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ......................................................................................................adjustable
K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................4.2 in (107 mm)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................5.2 in (133 mm)
Clam open (dozing)....................................................................................................................4.2 in (106 mm)
L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket:
General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................76.3 in (1.94 m)
4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................74.5 in (1.89 m)
M. Overall transport length:
Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ......................................................................23 ft 7 in (7.13 m)
Standard Backhoe 4 In 1 Bucket.............................................................................................22 ft 7 in (6.88 m)
Extendahoe 4 IN 1 Bucket ......................................................................................................22 ft 8 in (6.91 m)
Overall transport width:
Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m)
Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame standard backhoe ..........................................................14.6 in (371 mm)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame extendahoe ....................................................................14.8 in (375 mm)

8-34 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M AND SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 32

N. Transport height:
Standard Backhoe ..................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.41 m)
Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 7 in (3.54 m)
Height to:
Top of canopy..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.71 m)
Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 10 in (2.69 m)
Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 7 in (2.62 m)
Ground clearance at backhoe frame14.6 in (371 mm)
O. Wheelbase:
2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m)
4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m)
NOTE: Dimensions taken with 21L x 24 rear tires and 14.5 / 75L x 16.1 front tires except that data marked 4WD is
taken with 14 x 17.5 front tires.

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-35

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M OPERATIONAL DATA

Standard Backhoe
Digging depth:
Maximum...................................................................................................................................15 ft 11 in (4.85 m)
Maximum w/hi-capacity bucket....................................................................................................16 ft 4 in (4.98 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom ...........................................................................................................15 ft 10 in (4.83 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 11 in (4.55 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................23 ft 3 in (7.09 m)
Swing pivot ..................................................................................................................................19 ft 8 in (5.99 m)
Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m)
Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................9 ft 6 in (2.90 m)
Extendahoe
Digging depth:
Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................15 ft 11 in (4.85 m)
Maximum extended ...................................................................................................................19 ft 11 in (6.07 m)
With hi-capacity bucket:
Maximum retracted......................................................................................................................16 ft 4 in (4.98 m)
Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................20 ft 4 in (6.20 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ............................................................................................15 ft 10 in (4.83 m)
2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended ...........................................................................................19 ft 10 in (6.05 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 11 in (4.55 m)
8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................19 ft 2 in (5.84 m)
Overall reach from:
Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................23 ft 3 in (7.09 m)
Rear axle centerline extended ....................................................................................................27 ft 2 in (8.28 m)
Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................19 ft 8 in (5.99 m)
Swing pivot extended ..................................................................................................................23 ft 7 in (7.19 m)
Loading height
Retracted.....................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m)
Extended .....................................................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (3.48 m)
Loading reach
Retracted.......................................................................................................................................9 ft 6 in (2.90 m)
Extended .....................................................................................................................................12 ft 9 in (3.89 m)

8-36 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 590 SUPER M

Standard Backhoe
Boom Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 16 ft (4.87 m) 2 870 lbs (1302 kg)
+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 9 ft 9 in (2.97 m) 3 590lbs (1628 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 12 ft 1 in (3.69 m) 3 670 lbs (1665 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 8 in (4.16 m) 3 670 lbs (1665 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 11 in (4.47 m) 3 620 lbs (1642 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 15 ft 3 in (4.65 m) 3 550 lbs (1610 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 8 in (4.77 m) 3 460lbs (1569 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 10 in (4.82 m) 3 370 lbs (1529 kg)
Ground Level 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 3 330 lbs (1510 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 1 in (4.60 m) 3 250 lbs (1474 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 14 ft 4 in (4.37 m) 3 110 lbs (1411 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 13 ft 2 in (4.01 m) 3 040 lbs (1379 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) 2 960 lbs (1343 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 8 ft 9 in (2.67 m) 2 960 lbs (1343 kg)
- 12 ft (3.66 m) 2 930 lbs (1329 kg)
Dipper Lift
+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 9 ft 5 in (2.87 m) 4 800 lbs (2177 kg)
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 5 290lbs (2399 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 11 ft 0 in (3.35 m) 5 580 lbs (2531 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 5 750 lbs (2608 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 9 ft 4 in (2.84 m) 5 630 lbs (2554 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 6 ft 0in (1.83 m) 6 490 lbs (2944 kg)

Figure 33
NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) universal H.D.
trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

Extendahoe Retracted
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 14 ft (4.27 m)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 2 650 lbs (1202 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 15 ft 2 in (4.62 m) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 15 ft 6 in (4.72 m) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 2 525 lbs (1145 kg)
Ground Level 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 2 425 lbs (1100 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 2 400 lbs (1088 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 2 425 lbs (1099 kg)
- 12 ft (3.66 m)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 14 ft (4.27 m)
+12 ft (3.66 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 4 360lbs (1978 kg)
+10 ft (3.05 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 4 190lbs (1901 kg)
+8 ft (2.44 m) 10 ft 11 in (3.33 m) 4 160 lbs (1887 kg)
+6 ft (1.83 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg)
+4 ft (1.22 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.58 m) 5 590 lbs (2536 kg)

Figure 34

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-37

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 590 SUPER M CONTINUED -

Extendahoe Extended
Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
Boom Lift

+ 18 ft (5.48 m) 1 940 lbs (880 kg)

+ 16 ft (4.87 m) 13 ft 6 in (4.11 m) 2 200lbs (998 kg)
+ 14 ft (4.27 m) 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 16 ft 10 in (5.13 m) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 17 ft 11 in (5.46 m) 2 370 lbs (1075 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 18 ft 9 in (5.72 m) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 19 ft 3 in (5.87 m) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 19 ft 7 in (5.97 m) 2 310 lbs (1048 kg)
+ 2 ft (0.61 m) 19 ft 8 in (5.99 m) 2 290 lbs (1039 kg)
Ground Level 19 ft 6 in (5.94 m) 2 260 lbs (1025 kg)
− 2 ft (0.61 m) 19 ft 2 in (5.84 m) 2 230 lbs (1012 kg)
− 4 ft (1.22 m) 18 ft 6 in (5.64 m) 2 220 lbs (1007 kg)
− 6 ft (1.83 m) 17 ft 8 in (5.38 m) 2 140 lbs (971 kg)
- 8 ft (2.44 m) 16 ft 6 in (5.03 m) 2 110 lbs (957 kg)
- 10 ft (3.05 m) 14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) 2 090 lbs (948 kg)
- 12 ft (3.66 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.89 m) 2 180 lbs (989 kg)
- 14 ft (4.27 m) 9 ft 9 in (2.97 m) 2 240 lbs (1016 kg)
- 15 ft (4.57 m) 6 ft 0 in (1.83 m) 2 490 lbs (1129 kg)
Dipper Lift Distance from swing pivot Backhoe lift capacity
+ 16 ft (4.87 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 2 810 lbs (1275 kg)
+ 14 (4.27 m) 14 ft 0 in (4.27 m) 2 940 lbs (1334 kg)
+ 12 ft (3.66 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 3 080 lbs (1397 kg)
+ 10 ft (3.05 m) 14 ft 9 in (4.50 m) 3 100 lbs (1406 kg)
+ 8 ft (2.44 m) 14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 3 150 lbs (1429L kg)
+ 6 ft (1.83 m) 14 ft 0 in (4.27 m) 3 190 lbs (1447 kg)
+ 4 ft (1.22 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.89 m) 3 290 lbs (1492 kg)

NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) universal H.D.
trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

8-38 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M+ SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE

ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED
Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR)
Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged
Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm)
Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L)
Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR
Horsepower - rated
SAE net ...................................................................................................................... 109 hp (81 kW) @2200 rpm
SAE gross ................................................................................................................ 110 hp (82 kW) @2200 rpm
Maximum Torque
Net.............................................................................................................. 372 pound feet (505 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Gross.......................................................................................................... 381 pound feet (516 Nm) @ 1400 rpm
Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45%
Engine speeds:
Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm
Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000
High idle, no load..................................................................................................................................2380 - 2430
Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2220 - 2315
Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2350 - 2425
Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2350 - 2425
Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................2190 - 2305

POWERTRAIN
Transmissions
Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch
disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios Forward Reverse

1st 5.603 4.643
2nd 3.481 2.884
3rd 1.584 1.313
4th 0.793 0.657
Figure 35
Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................2.64
Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation
Front Axle
Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.0
Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.0
Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................12.0
Rear Axle
Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.5
Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.4
Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................16.0
Brakes
Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard
mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.
Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-39

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 Super M + Series 3 Specifications continued -

POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS

1st 2nd 3rd 4th

21L x 24 rear tires
mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 4.0 (6.4) 6.3 (10.1) 13.6 (21.8) 25.6 (41.1)
Reverse 4.7 (7.6) 7.5 (12.1) 16.3 (26.2) 30.7 (49.4)
NOTE: Engine @ 2320 rpm.

Figure 36

POWERSHIFT TRAVEL SPEEDS

1st 2nd 3rd 4th

21L x 24 rear tires
mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h) mph (km/h)
Forward 4.0 (6.4) 6.3 (10.1) 13.6 (21.8) 25.6 (41.1)
Reverse 4.8 (7.7) 7.8 (12.5) 16.8 (27.1)
NOTE: Engine between 2337 & 2404 rpm.

Figure 37

FRONT TIRES
2WD............................................................................................................................... 14.5/75 x 16.1 (10-ply rating)
4WD................................................................................................................................. 12.5/80 x 16.5 (8-ply rating)
REAR TIRES
2/4WD..................................................................................................................................... 21L x 24 (10-ply rating)

8-40 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 Super M + Series 3 Specifications continued -

HYDRAULICS
Pump .....................................Variable displacement axial piston, transmission mounted, coupled directly to engine
Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line
Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty
Loader flow @ rated engine rpm
Combined functions .........................................................................43.0 gpm @ 3100 psi (161 L/min @ 214 bar)
Individual functions...........................................................................31.5 gpm @ 3100 psi (119 L/min @ 214 bar)
Minimum flow......................................................................................................................... 4.0 gpm @ rated speed
Loader Control Valve:
Pressure compensated loader hydraulics for simultaneous lift and bucket operation. Sectional valve, single lever
control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.
Loader Control Handle:
Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.
.....................................................................................................................................0 to 31.5 gpm (0 to 119 L/min)
Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm .......................................................43.0 gpm @ 3100 psi (161 L/min @ 210 bar)

Pilot Backhoe Controls:

Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional
closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics:
Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable flow from .............................................................0 to 36.0 gpm (136 L/min)
Control operation:
Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated
Pilot ................................................................................................................................... button on left joystick
Bi-directional flow, variable from .......................................................... 0 to 38 gpm (144 L/min) @ rated engine rpm

590 SUPER M + OPERATING WEIGHTS

Lightest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
2WD, ROPS canopy, vinyl air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm)
universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, single battery, flip
over stabilizer pads, and no operator ........................................................................................ 15 268 lbs (6926 kg).
Heaviest Configuration
Machine equipped with:
4WD, ROPS cab, cloth air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal
backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, dual batteries, flip
stabilizer pads, and no operator ............................................................................................. 19 578 lbs (8881 kg)

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-41

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LOADER AND BACKHOE BUCKETS

LOADER BUCKETS

Width Capacities Capacities Weight

mm (Inch) Type Struck SAE Heaped
kg (lbs)
m3 (cu yd) m3 (cu yd)
2083 (82) Standard 0.67 (.88) 0.77 (1.01) 392 (864)
2083 (82) 4-in-1 0.65 (.85) 0.80 (1.04) 658 (1451)
2362 (93) Optional 0.82 (1.07) 0.96 (1.25) 423 (933)
*All weights include 47 kg (103 lbs) for bolt on cutting edge.
Figure 38
BACKHOE BUCKETS - 580 SUPER M
Capacities Capacities SAE
Width Weight
mm (Inch) Type Struck Heaped kg (lbs)
m3 (cu feet) m3 (cu feet)
305 (12) Universal HD 0.08 (3.00) 0.10 (3.40) 132 (290)
406 (16) Universal HD 0.08 (2.92 0.10 (3.60) 157 (346)
457 (18) Universal HD 0.12 (4.40) 0.15 (5.30) 159 (350)
610 (24) Universal HD 0.17 (6.10) 0.22 (7.70) 187 (413)
762 (30) Universal HD 0.22 (7.90) 0.29 (10.20) 215 (475)
914 (36) Universal HD 0.27 (9.60) 0.36 (12.70) 243 (535)
610 (24) H.D. Hi Capacity 0.20 (6.90) 0.24 (8.50) 204 (450)
762 (30) H.D. Hi Capacity 0.24 (8.60) 0.30 (10.60) 235 (517)
Figure 39
LOADER BUCKETS

Capacities Capacities
Width Weight
mm (Inch) Type Struck SAE Heaped kg (lbs)
m3 (cu yd) m3 (cu yd)
2362 (93) Standard 0.82 (1.07) 0.96 (1.25) 423 (933)
2362 (93) 4-in-1 0.76 (1.00) 0.92 (1.20) 738 (1628)
*All weights include 47 kg (103 lbs) for bolt on cutting edge.
Figure 40
BACKHOE BUCKETS - 580 SUPER M +

Capacities Capacities SAE

Width Weight
mm (Inch) Type Struck Heaped
kg (lbs)
m3 (cu feet) m3 (cu feet)
305 (12) Universal HD 0.08 (3.00) 0.10 (3.40) 132 (290)
406 (16) Universal HD 0.08 (2.92 0.10 (3.60) 157 (346)
457 (18) Universal HD 0.12 (4.40) 0.15 (5.30) 159 (350)
610 (24) Universal HD 0.17 (6.10) 0.22 (7.70) 187 (413)
762 (30) Universal HD 0.22 (7.90) 0.29 (10.20) 215 (475)
914 (36) Universal HD 0.27 (9.60) 0.36 (12.70) 243 (535)
610 (24) H.D. Hi Capacity 0.20 (6.90) 0.24 (8.50) 204 (450)
762 (30) H.D. Hi Capacity 0.24 (8.60) 0.30 (10.60) 235 (517)
Figure 41
LOADER BUCKETS

Width Capacities Capacities Weight

mm (Inch) Type Struck SAE Heaped
kg (lbs)
m3 (cu yd) m3 (cu yd)
2362 (93) Standard 0.84 (1.10) 0.99 (1.30) 509 (1123)
2362 (93) 4-in-1 0.76 (1.00) 0.92 (1.20) 738 (1628)
2438 (96) Optional 0.97 (1.27) 1.15 (1.50) 601 (1324)
*Add 47 kg (103 lbs) for bolt on cutting edge.
Figure 42

8-42 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

BACKHOE BUCKETS

Width Capacities Capacities SAE Weight

mm (Inch) Type Struck Heaped
kg (lbs)
m3 (cu feet) m3 (cu feet)
305 (12) Universal HD 0.08 (3.00) 0.10 (3.40) 132 (290)
406 (16) Universal HD 0.08 (2.92) 0.10 (3.60) 157 (346)
457 (18) Universal HD 0.12 (4.40) 0.15 (5.30) 159 (350)
610 (24) Universal HD 0.17 (6.10) 0.22 (7.70) 187 (413)
762 (30) Universal HD 0.22 (7.90) 0.29 (10.20) 215 (475)
914 (36) Universal HD 0.27 (9.60) 0.36 (12.70) 243 (535)
610 (24) H.D. Hi Capacity 0.20 (6.90) 0.24 (8.50) 204 (450)
762 (30) H.D. Hi Capacity 0.24 (8.60) 0.30 (10.60) 235 (517)
Figure 43

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-43

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

TORQUE VALUES
Use the following torques when special torques are not given. These torques apply to fasteners with both UNC and
UNF threads as received from suppliers dry, or when lubricated with engine oil. Not applicable if special graphities,
Molydisulfide greases, or other extreme pressure lubricants are used.

Grade 5 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs

Pound- Newton
Size Inches metres
1/4 inch 108 to 132 12 to 15
5/16 inch 204 to 252 23 to 28
3/8 inch 420 to 504 48 to 57
7/16 inch 54 to 64 73 to 87
1/2 inch 80 to 96 109 to 130
9/16 inch 110 to 132 149 to 179
5/8 inch 150 to 180 203 to 244
3/4 inch 270 to 324 366 to 439
7/8 inch 400 to 480 542 to 651
1.0 inch 580 to 696 787 to 944
1-1/8 inch 800 to 880 1085 to 1193
1-1/4 inch 1120 to 1240 1519 to 1681
1-3/8 inch 1460 to 1680 1980 to 2278
1-1/2 inch 1940 to 2200 2631 to 2983
Figure 44

8-44 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Grade 8 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs Grade 8.8 Bolts, Nuts, and
Studs

Pound- Newton 8.8

Size Inches metres
1/4 inch 144 to 180 16 to 20 Pound- Newton
Size Inches metres
5/16 inch 288 to 348 33 to 39
M4 24 to 36 3 to 4
3/8 inch 540 to 648 61 to 73
M5 60 to 72 7 to 8
7/16 inch 70 to 84 95 to 114
M6 96 to 108 11 to 12
1/2 inch 110 to 132 149 to 179
M8 228 to 276 26 to 31
9/16 inch 160 to 192 217 to 260
M10 456 to 540 52 to 61
5/8 inch 220 to 264 298 to 358
M12 66 to 79 90 to 107
3/4 inch 380 to 456 515 to 618
M14 106 to 127 144 to 172
7/8 inch 600 to 720 814 to 976
M16 160 to 200 217 to 271
1.0 inch 900 to 1080 1220 to 1465
M20 320 to 380 434 to 515
1-1/8 inch 1280 to 1440 1736 to 1953
M24 500 to 600 675 to 815
1-1/4 inch 1820 to 2000 2468 to 2712
M30 920 to 1100 1250 to 1500
1-3/8 inch 2380 to 2720 3227 to 3688
M36 1600 to 1950 2175 to 2600
1-1/2 inch 3160 to 3560 4285 to 4827
NOTE: Use thick nuts with Grade 8 bolts. Figure 46

Figure 45

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-45

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Grade 10.9 Bolts, Nuts, and

Studs

10.9

Pound- Newton
Size Inches metres
M4 36 to 48 4 to 5
M5 84 to 96 9 to 11
M6 132 to 156 15 to 18
M8 324 to 384 37 to 43
M10 54 to 64 73 to 87
M12 93 to 112 125 to 150
M14 149 to 179 200 to 245
M16 230 to 280 310 to 380
M20 450 to 540 610 to 730
M24 780 to 940 1050 to 1275
M30 1470 to 1770 2000 to 2400
M36 2580 to 3090 3500 to 4200
Figure 47
Grade 12.9 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs

12.9

Usually the torque values specified for grade 10.9

fasteners can be used satisfactorily on grade 12.9
fasteners.

8-46 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

MATERIAL WEIGHTS

MATERIAL kg/m3 lbs/ft3 MATERIAL kg/m3 lbs/ft3

Alum-Lump. 881 55 Oats 416 26
Pulverized 769 48 Peanuts - Shelled 280 17
Ashes 561-833 35-52 Peas 769 48
Bauxite 1202-1922 75-120 Peat - solid 753 47
Beans 769 48 Phosphate - Granular 1442 90
Charcoal 368 23 Potash 1089 68
Chips 288 18 Potatoes 769 48
Coal 1282 80 Quartz - Granular 1762 110
Coke - Lump - Loose 849-1009 53-63 Rice 769 48
Clay 368-513 23-32 Rye 705 44
Concrete 1378-1778 86-111 Salt - Rock - Solid 2163 135
Copper Ore 1666 104 Sand & Gravel - Dry 1730 108
Corn - Shelled 673 42 Wet 2003 125
Cottonseed 401 25 Sand - Foundry 1522 95
Earth - Dry Loam 929-1089 58-68 Shale 1410 88
Wet 1602-1666 100-104 Slag - Crushed 1121 70
Earth - Sand Gravel 1570 98 Slate 2243 130
Ensilage 577 36 Snow 240-801 15-50
Granite 1490-1778 93-111 Soybeans 743 46
Gravel - Dry 1522 95 Sugar Beet Pulp - Wet 561 35
Wet 1906 119 Sugar - Raw 961 60
Ice - Crushed 593 37 Sulphur - Lumpy 1330 83
Iron Ore 2323 145 Taconite 1714 107
Limestone - Loose - Wheat 769 48
1538-1602 96-100
Crushed Figure 49
Figure 48

84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 8-47

 CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

NOTES

8-48 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

 CHAPTER 9 - INDEX

Chapter 9
INDEX

Numerics Before You Operate the Machine .........................4-8

4-IN-1 Bucket Operation .................................... 4-12 Booster Battery Connection to Machine (Jump
Starting the Machine) .....................................4-7
A Brake, Parking ....................................................3-13
After Delivery Check ................................. 10-1, 10-3 Bucket Indicator (4-in-1 Bucket) .........................4-11
Air Suspension Seat .......................................... 3-47 Bucket Operation (4-in-1)
Alarm Clamshell Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ........4-12
Audible .......................................................... 3-25 Dozing With 4-in-1 Bucket ..............................4-12
Seat Switch System ...................................... 3-26 Scraper ..........................................................4-12
Standard Bucket Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ....
As Required Service .......................................... 5-11
4-12
Audible Alarm .................................................... 3-25
Auxiliary Hydraulic C
Control Lever ................................................. 3-43
Cab Air Conditioning
Auxiliary Hydraulic Attachment Control For Backhoes Lubricating the Air Conditioning Compressor Seals
3-43 5-38
Auxiliary Hydraulic Control Lever ...................... 3-43 Cab Air Louvers ..................................................3-49
Main Louvers ..................................................3-49
B Recirculation Louvers .....................................3-49
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics ............................ 4-32 Cab and Canopy Options
Backhoe Bucket Capacities, 580 Super M ........ 8-42 Radio Ready Package ...................................3-51
Backhoe Bucket Capacities, 590 Super M ........ 8-43 Case Backhoe Bucket Coupler ..........................4-28
Backhoe Controls ..................................... 3-29, 3-32 Cast Ductile Iron Safety Message ......................2-10
Backhoe Controls with Foot Swing .................... 3-30 Cemetery Stabilizer Pads With Rubber Pads .....4-18
Backhoe Controls With Hand Swing .................. 3-33 Clam Depth Indicator for the 4-In-1 Bucket ........4-11
Backhoe Controls With Hand Swing and Extendable Clamshell Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ............4-12
Dipper .......................................................... 3-34 Clutch Cutout Switch ..........................................4-10
Backhoe Danger Area ....................................... 4-24 Coat Hook ..........................................................3-51
Backhoe Grease Fittings ................................... 5-20 Combination Flip-Over Stabilizer Pads ..............4-18
Backhoe In Transport Position .......................... 4-27 Console Control
Backhoe Operation ............................................ 4-17 Left Side .........................................................3-14
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics ........................ 4-32 Console Controls
Backhoe Danger Area ................................... 4-24 Front .................................................................3-4
Backhoe In Transport Position ...................... 4-27 Control
Before You Dig With Backhoe ....................... 4-19 Auxiliary Hydraulic ..........................................3-43
Case Backhoe Bucket Coupler ..................... 4-28
Controls
Digging With Backhoe ................................... 4-24
Auxiliary Hydraulic Attachment For Backhoes ......
General Information ...................................... 4-17
3-43
Increased Rotation Backhoe Bucket Coupler 4-22
Backhoe ............................................... 3-29, 3-32
Lifting With the Backhoe ............................... 4-31
Backhoe with Foot Swing ...............................3-30
Moving the Machine Forward When You Are
Backhoe With Hand Swing .............................3-33
Digging on Level Ground ...................... 4-26
Backhoe With Hand Swing and Extendable Dipper
Safety When You Work ................................. 4-17
3-34
Stabilizer Pads .............................................. 4-17
Extendahoe with Foot Swing ..........................3-31
Battery Fluid Level ............................................... 7-3
Battery Service .................................................... 7-3 D
Battery Fluid Level .......................................... 7-3
Damage To The ROPS ........................................6-9
Battery Vents ................................................... 7-3
Digging With Backhoe ........................................4-24
Battery Vents ....................................................... 7-3
Filling the Bucket ............................................4-25
Before You Dig With Backhoe ........................... 4-19
Direction Control Lever .........................................3-6
84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 9-1
 CHAPTER 9 - INDEX

Dome Lamp ......................................................... 7-4 H

Door Latch ......................................................... 3-50 Hand Signals ......................................................2-24
Dozing With 4-in-1 Bucket ................................. 4-12 Heater Coolant Shutoff Valve .............................3-14
Driving and Flood Lamps ..................................... 7-5 Hot Weather, Operating .......................................4-7
Driving Lamps, Vertical Adjustment ..................... 7-6 Hourmeter, Engine .............................................3-19

E I
Electrical Identification Numbers ..........................................1-4
Battery Service ................................................ 7-3 Increased Rotation Backhoe Bucket Coupler .....4-22
Fuses .............................................................. 7-9
Instrument Panel ............................. 3-17, 3-18, 3-19
Relays ........................................................... 7-10
Vertical Adjustment of Driving and Work Lamps ... Instruments and Controls
7-6 Cab Air Louvers .............................................3-49
Extendahoe Controls With Hand Swing .........3-34
Electrical System
Instrument Cluster ........................................... 7-7
J
Engine Data For Naturally Aspirated Engine ...... 8-3,
8-12, 8-21, 8-30, 8-39 Job Layout For Loader Operation ......................4-14
Engine Hourmeter ...................................... 3-19, 5-4 Jump Starting the Machine ...................................4-7
Engine Operation ................................................. 4-3
Engine Speed .................................................. 4-5 L
Parking the Machine ....................................... 4-5 Lamp Replacement
Starting the Engine .......................................... 4-3 Dome Lamp .....................................................7-4
Starting the Engine With a Turbocharger ........ 4-4 Driving and Flood Lamps .................................7-5
Walk-Around Inspection .................................. 4-3 Flasher and Turn Signal - Canopy ...................7-4
Engine Speed ...................................................... 4-5 Flasher Lamp, Cab ..........................................7-4
Stop and Tail Lamps ........................................7-4
Engine Starting Aids
Stop Lamps ......................................................7-4
Booster Battery Connection to Machine (Jump
Tail Lamps .......................................................7-4
Starting the Machine) ............................. 4-7
Turn Signal, Cab ..............................................7-4
Extendahoe Controls with Foot Swing ............... 3-31
Lever
Extendahoe Controls With Hand Swing ............ 3-34 Direction Control ..............................................3-6
Lift Arm and Bucket Controls ..............................3-10
F
Lifting With the Backhoe .....................................4-31
Fan Drive Belt Replacement ................................ 6-4
Lifting With the Loader .......................................4-15
Fire Extinguisher
Loader Bucket Capacities, 580 Super M ............8-42
Type Of Fire Extinguisher ............................. 6-11
Loader Bucket Capacities, 590 Super M ............8-42
Flasher and Turn Signal - Canopy ....................... 7-4
Loader Controls
Flasher Lamp Replacement, Cab ........................ 7-4
Lift Arm and Bucket ........................................3-10
Fluid Levels
Loader Hydraulic Coupler
Battery ............................................................. 7-3
Removing An Attachment ..............................4-16
Fluids and Lubricants .......................................... 5-6
Loader Hydraulic Coupler (Optional) ..................4-16
Foot Pedals Installing An Attachment ................................4-16
Foot Throttle .................................................... 3-9
Loader Operation ...............................................4-10
Foot Throttle ........................................................ 3-9 4-IN-1 Bucket Operation ................................4-12
Fuel Filter Replacement .................................... 5-39 Bucket Indicator (4-in-1 Bucket) .....................4-11
Fuel handling precautions ................................... 2-8 Clam Depth Indicator for the 4-In-1 Bucket ....4-11
Fuses ................................................................... 7-9 Clutch Cutout Switch ......................................4-10
Job Layout .....................................................4-14
G Lifting With the Loader ...................................4-15
Loader Hydraulic Coupler (Optional) .............4-16
Gauge
Return-To-Dig ................................................4-13
Oil Temperature (Torque Converter) ............. 3-19
Safety When You Work ..................................4-10
General Safety Before You Service ..................... 5-3 Standard Bucket Level Indicator ....................4-11
Loader Return-To-Dig Adjustment .......................6-3
Lubricating the Air Conditioning Compressor Seals ..
9-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA
 CHAPTER 9 - INDEX

5-38 Relays ................................................................7-10

Lubrication ........................................................... 5-3 Return-To-Dig .....................................................4-13
Backhoe Grease Fittings ............................... 5-20 Ride Control Accumulator ....................................6-7
Fluids and Lubricants ...................................... 5-6 Right Side Instrument Console ...........................3-52
General Safety Before You Service ................ 5-3
Right Side Instrument Console Lockup Kit .........3-52
Support Strut For Loader Lift Arms ................. 5-5
Systemgard Lubrication Analysis .................... 5-9 Right, Left, Front and Rear of the Machine ..........1-3
Lubrication/Maintenance Charts Roll-Over Protective Structure ..............................6-7
Engine Hourmeter ........................................... 5-4 Damage To The ROPS ....................................6-9
Maintenance and Inspection Of ROPS ............6-8
ROPS Cab Label ..............................................6-8
M
ROPS Canopy and Cab Mounting Bolts ..........6-9
Machine Components .......................................... 1-6 ROPS Canopy Label ........................................6-7
Machine Operation Seat Belt Maintenance .....................................6-7
Before You Operate the Machine .................... 4-8 ROPS Cab Label ..................................................6-8
Machine Operation Safety Message ................. 2-10 ROPS Canopy and Cab Mounting Bolts ..............6-9
Maintenance and Adjustments ROPS Canopy Label ............................................6-7
Fan Drive Belt Replacement ........................... 6-4
Run-In Period For A New Machine
Loader Return-To-Dig Adjustment .................. 6-3
Engine Operation .............................................4-3
Plastic and Resin Parts ................................... 6-4
Ride Control Accumulator ............................... 6-7
Roll-Over Protective Structure ........................ 6-7 S
Maintenance and Inspection Of ROPS ................ 6-8 Safety Decals .....................................................2-11
Material Weights ................................................ 8-47 Safety Rules Message .........................................2-3
Mechanical Suspension Seat ............................ 3-46 Safety/Decals/Hand Signals
Cast Ductile Iron .............................................2-10
Mirror
Hand Signals ..................................................2-24
Rear View ...................................................... 3-51
Machine Operation .........................................2-10
Moving a Disabled Machine Read Operators Manual .................................2-10
Engine Running ............................................. 4-34 Safety Decals .................................................2-11
Engine Stopped ............................................. 4-34 Safety Rules .....................................................2-3
Moving the Machine Forward When You Are Digging Utility Safety .....................................................2-4
on Level Ground .......................................... 4-26 Scraper Operation (4-in-1 Bucket) .....................4-12
Seat
O Air Suspension ...............................................3-47
Oil Temperature Gauge (Torque Converter) ..... 3-19 Belts ...............................................................3-44
Operating in Hot Weather .................................... 4-7 Seat Alarm Test Procedure ................................3-26
Operating Instructions Seat Belt Maintenance .........................................6-7
Vandal Lockup Kits ....................................... 3-52 Seat Belts ...........................................................3-44
Operator Manual Storage Compartment ............. 1-2 Seat Maintenance ..............................................6-10
Operators Manual, Read ................................... 2-10 Seat Switch Alarm System .................................3-26
Specifications
P 580M ................................................................8-3
Parking Brake .................................................... 3-13 Specifications - 580 Super M
Parking the Machine ............................................ 4-5 Backhoe Buckets Capacities ..........................8-42
Plastic and Resin Parts ....................................... 6-4 Loader Buckets Capacities ............................8-42
Pump Charge Procedure ..................................... 6-7 Specifications - 580M
Purging Air From Fuel System 580M ................ 5-32 Engine Data For Naturally Aspirated Engine ..8-3,
Purging Air From Fuel System SM and SM+ ..... 5-30 8-12, 8-21, 8-30, 8-39
Specifications - 590 Super M
R Backhoe Buckets Capacities ..........................8-43
Loader Buckets Capacities ............................8-42
Radio Ready Package ....................................... 3-51
Stabilizer Pads ...................................................4-17
Read Operators Manual .................................... 2-10
Cemetery Stabilizer Pads With Rubber Pads 4-18
Rear View Mirror ................................................ 3-51 Combination Flip-Over Stabilizer Pads ..........4-18
Rear Windows ................................................... 3-51 Standard Two Position Stabilizer Pads ..........4-18
84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 9-3
 CHAPTER 9 - INDEX

Standard Bucket Level Indicator ........................ 4-11

Standard Bucket Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket . 4-12
Standard Two Position Stabilizer Pads ............. 4-18
Starting the Engine .............................................. 4-3
Starting the Engine With A Turbocharger ............ 4-4
Stop and Tail Lamp Replacement ....................... 7-4
Stop and Tail Lamps ............................................ 7-4
Storage Compartment
Operator Manual ............................................. 1-2
Support Strut For Loader Lift Arms ...................... 5-5
Swing Lock Transport Pin .................................. 3-52
Systemgard Lubrication Analysis ........................ 5-9

T
Tachometer ....................................................... 3-19
To The Owner
Identification Numbers .................................... 1-4
M Series Loader Backhoes ............................. 1-1
Machine Components ..................................... 1-6
Right, Left, Front and Rear of the Machine ..... 1-3
Towing
See Moving a Disabled Machine ............ 4-9, 4-33
Transporting the Machine on a Trailer ............... 4-35
Turn Signal Replacement, Cab ........................... 7-4

U
Unloading A Machine From A Trailer ................ 4-35
Utility Safety Rules Message ............................... 2-4

V
Vandal Lockup Kits ............................................ 3-52

W
Walk Around Inspection ....................................... 4-3
Welding on the Machine .................................... 6-12
Window
Latch ............................................................. 3-50
Rear .............................................................. 3-51
Retainer Release .......................................... 3-50
Window Latch .................................................... 3-50
Window Retainer Release ................................. 3-50
Work Lamps, Vertical Adjustment ....................... 7-6

9-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

✄-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK
Chapter 10
AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - DEALER COPY

AFTER FIRST 100 HOURS OF OPERATION OF NEW MACHINE

Owners Name:

Address:

Dealers Name:

Address:

Machine Model Number: Hourmeter Indication:

Machine Product Identification Number (P.I.N.):

COOLING SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Check the coolant levels. Check the oil level.
Check for leaks. Replace the hydraulic oil filter.

FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL

Check for leaks. Look for oil leaks and loose parts.
Drain water and sediment from the fuel system. Check tire pressure and wheel torque.
Tighten all hose clamps.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Check drive chain tension
Check battery. Check track tension if equipped.
Check operation of starter, alternator, and instruments. Check brake operation.
Check operation of all lamps. Check the control levers for correct operation.
Check the operators seat for correct operation
LUBRICATION SAFETY
Lubricate all pivot points. Inspect the ROPS.
Check the safety decals and replace if necessary.
ENGINE Check the operator restraint system.
Check condition of drive belt. Make sure the machine has the operators manual in the manual storage
box.
Check engine oil level.
Check engine speed at idle and at full throttle.

DEALER: Make sure the owner and/or operator understands all the safety and information decals, the service information, and the service procedures
in this manual.

Technician Signature:

Dealer Signature:

Owner Signature:
Dealer Copy
84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 10-1
 CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

10-2 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA

✄-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - OWNERS COPY

AFTER FIRST 100 HOURS OF OPERATION OF NEW MACHINE

Owners Name:

Address:

Dealers Name:

Address:

Machine Model Number: Hourmeter Indication:

Machine Product Identification Number (P.I.N.):

COOLING SYSTEM HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Check the coolant levels. Check the oil level.
Check for leaks. Replace the hydraulic oil filter.

FUEL SYSTEM GENERAL

Check for leaks. Look for oil leaks and loose parts.
Drain water and sediment from the fuel tanks. Check tire pressure and wheel torque.
Tighten all hose clamps.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Check drive chain tension.
Check battery. Check track tension if equipped.
Check operation of starter, alternator, and instruments. Check brake operation.
Check operation of all lamps. Check the control levers for correct operation.
Check the operators seat for correct operation.
LUBRICATION SAFETY
Lubricate all pivot points. Inspect the ROPS.
Check the safety decals and replace if necessary.
ENGINE Check the operator restraint system.
Check condition of drive belt. Make sure the machine has the operators manual in the manual storage
box.
Check engine oil level.
Check engine speed at idle and at full throttle.

DEALER: Make sure the owner and/or operator understands all the safety and information decals, the service information, and the service procedures
in this manual.

Technician Signature:

Dealer Signature:

Owner Signature:
Owners Copy
84287120NA Issued 01-10 Rac 10-3
 CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

10-4 Issued 01-10 Rac 84287120NA